· Wellstar Health System, Inc. May 5, 2017 Cobb Hospital Chiller Plant Upgrade TRO No. 2017021 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 230100 - 1 SECTION 230100 BASIC MECHANICAL

Wellstar Health System, Inc. May 5, 2017

Cobb Hospital Chiller Plant Upgrade

TRO No. 2017021

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

230100 - 1

SECTION 230100


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-

tions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Organization of Submittals.

2. Proposed substitutions.

3. Coordination drawings.

4. Infection control requirements.

5. Phasing requirements.

6. Core drilling.

7. Penetrations.

8. Grout.

9. Mechanical demolition.

10. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

11. Painting and finishing.

12. Record documents.

13. Systems start-ups and Commissioning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,

pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexca-

vated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied

spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient tem-

peratures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by

building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 2

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions

and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Ex-

amples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General Requirements: Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Sections “Submittal Pro-

cedures and Substitution Request Form”, the Sections of Division 23- Heating Ventilating And

Air Conditioning, and the additional requirements of this Section.

1. Copies of faxed pages within submittal packages will be rejected.

B. Materials List: Within 14 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to

proceed, submit a list of the proposed materials to be provided under the work of the Mechani-

cal Sections of Division 23.

C. Organization of Submittals: Bind submittals into comprehensible packages with related product

data sheets organized and identified by Specification Section and Article numbers. Bind submit-

tals into packages as specified in the Sections of Division 23. Identify submittal pages to indi-

cate the specific equipment or fixture type the data sheet applies to. Submittals that are not

properly bound and identified may be returned without review. Submittals will be rejected

without review if not submitted by individual specification section.

1. Indicate appropriate model numbers in manufacturers' brochures and cross out non-

applicable information.

2. Copies of faxed pages are unacceptable.

3. Submit shop drawings for particular systems complete, simultaneously, and organized by

system.

D. Schedule of Shut-downs: After the project construction schedule is developed, submit the fol-

lowing information to the Owner for all required shut-downs of existing systems.

1. Date of proposed shut-down.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 3

2. List of systems to be affected.

3. List of areas affected by the shut-down.

4. Description of work to be performed.

5. Estimated length of the shut-down.

E. UL Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Prepare and submit a schedule to indicate

the UL-System number for through-penetration assemblies to be used with all mechanical sys-

tems. Coordinate with the work of Division 7 Section “Firestopping and Smokeseals”.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Record Drawings: Prepare record drawings in accordance with the provisions of Division 1

Section “Project Record Documents” and the additional requirements of this Section.

H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Prepare and submit copies of the Operation and Mainte-

nance Manuals as specified in Division 1 Section “Contract Close-Out”, Division 1 Section

“Operation and Maintenance Data”, and in Article 1.10 of this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled, licensed workers who are thoroughly trained

and experienced and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the meth-

ods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Standard of Quality: The manufacturers names scheduled on the drawings are used for the de-

sign and to establish the standard of quality upon which the Contract is based. Acceptable

manufacturer’s names are listed in the specification to provide competitive bids with the speci-

fied or scheduled manufacturer.

1. The inclusion of a manufacturer’s name within the list of acceptable manufacturers does

not necessarily mean that the manufacturer’s standard product is equal to the specified or

scheduled product without some required modification. The submitted product shall be

equal in all respects to the specified product.

C. Substitutions: Substitutions include manufacturers not listed as acceptable within the specifica-

tions, or products, systems and methods that differ from the specified systems.

1. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 Sections “Submittal Procedures and Substitu-

tion Request Form. Submit list of proposed substitutes for review and approval in com-

pliance with Article 3 of the Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701.

2. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify that the products of acceptable manufacturers

and proposed substitutes meet or exceed the performance of the specified or scheduled

product including the following:

a. Horsepower: Equal or less.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 4

b. Efficiency: Equal or greater.

c. Capacities: Equal or greater.

d. Space/Clearances: Equal or greater.

e. Storage and Recovery: Equal or greater.

f. Warranty: Equal or better.

g. Weight (Lbs): Equal or less.

h. Noise: Equal or quieter.

3. By the submission of a proposed substitution, the Contractor represents that he has re-

viewed the proposed substitution and certifies that:

a. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on drawings.

b. Changes to the building design, including A/E design and review time at a rate of

2.7 x DPE, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested substitution

will be included in the bid price with no additional cost to the Owner.

c. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construc-

tion schedule, or specified warranty requirements.

d. Maintenance and service parts are available locally.

e. All costs associated with the use of the proposed substitute will be covered by the

Contractor.

D. Qualifications for Welding and Brazing Work:

1. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Struc-

tural Welding Code--Steel."

2. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

a. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

b. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

1) If re-certification of welders is required, re-testing will be Contractor's re-

sponsibility.

1.6 CODES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS

A. Perform all work in strict accordance with all applicable Rules, Laws, Regulations, Codes, and

Ordinances of Local, State, and Federal Governments.

1. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regula-

tions of authorities that have jurisdiction.

2. In case of conflict between or among specified requirements and pertinent regulations,

the more stringent requirement shall govern when so directed by the Architect.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 5

B. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the applicable regulations and retain at the Project site

to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need.

C. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent require-

ments, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or

copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made

a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

D. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents,

unless otherwise indicated.

E. Copies of Standards: Obtain copies of the most recent editions of the following standards and

retain at the Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need:

1. UL Through Penetration Fire Stop Systems.

2. SMACNA Fire Damper Installation Guide.

3. SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Upon completion of the Work, and as a condition of its acceptance, deliver to the Architect two

copies of a written Warranty agreeing to replace the work of each mechanical section which

fails due to defective materials or workmanship within one year after Date of Substantial Com-

pletion. Date of Substantial Completion shall be as determined in accordance with the General

Conditions.

B. Failure due to defective materials or workmanship is deemed to include, but not to be limited to:

1. Failures in operating component or components.

2. Leakage from piping system.

3. Code violations.

C. The use of systems or equipment provided under Division 23 Sections for temporary services

and facilities shall not constitute Final Acceptance of work nor beneficial use by the Owner, and

shall not institute the Warranty period.

D. Obtain written equipment and material warranties offered in manufacturers published data

without exclusion or limitation, in Owner's name.

E. Replace material and equipment that require excessive service during guarantee period as de-

fined and as directed by Architect.

F. Guarantee shall include 24-hour service of complete system during guarantee period at no cost

to Owner. Choice of service organization shall be subject to Owner's approval.

http://www.smacna.org/bookstore/index.cfm?fuseaction=search_results&keyword=HVAC%20Duct%20Construction%20Standards%20-%20Metal%20and%20Flexible



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 6

G. Submit guarantee to Architect before final payment and include in the Operation and Mainte-

nance Manuals.

H. At end of guarantee period, transfer manufacturer's equipment and material warranties still in

force to Owner.

I. This Article shall not be interpreted to limit Owner's rights under applicable codes and laws and

under this Contract.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with Article 2 of the Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701, including the Ap-

pendix. Visit the site prior to submission of bids and examine existing conditions to be familiar

with the related implications to the Work of the Mechanical Sections.

B. Questions regarding the Bidding Documents: Submit questions and requests for clarifications

in compliance with the Instructions to Bidders.

C. Contract Documents: The Contract Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show every fitting

and component and shall be used in conjunction with the specified requirements to provide

complete and functional systems. The drawings and specifications are complimentary, and the

requirements indicated on both establish the requirements of the Contract.

D. Document Review: Review the complete set of Contract Documents and be familiar with the

space requirements of other trades. Thoroughly review building sections, architectural details,

and mechanical and electrical drawings for a complete understanding of the scope and coordina-

tion requirements of the Mechanical Sections.

E. Scheduled Equipment: Standard manufacturers model numbers scheduled on the drawings shall

be modified as specified in the descriptive specification for the scheduled equipment. The

drawings generally define quantities, and the specifications further define equipment quality and

system components, which may not be included in the standard model number.

F. Pipe sizing notations: Pipe sizing notations run along the pipe from the larger sizes to the

smaller size. Sections of pipe that are not specifically identified with a pipe size are the contin-

uation of the previous larger pipe size indication. Pipe sizes change only where indicated by a

notation change.

G. Existing Conditions: The existing conditions indicated on the contract drawings are taken

largely from existing record drawings and past field investigation by project architects and en-

gineers. Conditions may have been renovated and/or changed without the knowledge of the

project architect and engineer since field investigations were performed. Preparation work by

the contractor responsible for the mechanical sections includes the verification of existing con-

ditions before the start of related installation work.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 7

1.9 DUST AND AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS CONTROL

A. Comply with the requirements of dust and airborne contaminant control as specified in Division

1 Section – “Infection Control Procedures”.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Prepare coordination drawings as specified in Division 1 Section – “Special Provisions”.

B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place con-

crete and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that

are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8

Section "Access Doors and Frames."

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials before, during and after installation

and to protect installed work and materials of all trades and Sections. Refer to individual Divi-

sion 23 material sections for delivery, storage, and handling requirements.

B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacement neces-

sary to the approval of the Architect at no change in Contract Sum.

1.12 MANUALS AND INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 1 Section – “Contract Closeout”.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Bind Manuals in hard-cover, three-ring binders, and pro-

vide identified dividers with tabs. Indicate appropriate model numbers in manufacturers' bro-

chures and cross out non-applicable information. Review the Manuals with the Owner's

maintenance personnel and add additional maintenance data sheets and information as directed

by the Owner's Representatives. Copies of faxed pages are unacceptable. Electronic PDF for-

mat manuals are acceptable in lieu of the bound manual if agreed to by the Owner’s Representa-

tives.

C. Division of Manuals: Divide manuals with tabs to match the mechanical specification sections.

D. Each Manual shall include:



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 8

1. Table of contents.

2. Subcontractor's warranties.

3. Name and telephone number of local representative or supplier.

4. Manufacturers' maintenance procedures.

5. Exploded drawings and parts lists.

6. Troubleshooting checklists with potential problems and possible causes.

7. Schematic wiring diagrams.

8. Record drawings.

9. Valve tag charts.

10. Equipment warranties and guaranties.

11. Additional requirements specified in the mechanical sections.

E. Instruction Seminar: Perform systems instruction seminar and walk-through with the Owner's

representatives after preparation and review of the Operation and Maintenance manuals.

1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents for the work of Division 23 as specified in Division 1 Section “Pro-

ject Record Documents”. The record drawings shall accurately indicate all valve locations and

shall clearly show the assigned valve tag number. Record drawings shall include:

1. Ductwork, Piping, and equipment locations.

2. Valve locations and valve tag numbers.

3. Equipment identification numbers coordinated with the Owner's Facility Management

Program.

B. Record drawings include ductwork fabrication drawings or coordination drawings prepared un-

der the work of this Contract. Provide electronic drawing files of both the Contract Drawings

and additional fabrication/coordination drawings that indicate mechanical systems. The elec-

tronic drawing file format must be coordinated with the Owner’s standards. The electronic

drawing files shall be prepared using AutoCAD, Revit, or Navisworks as indicated by the Own-

er.

C. Submission of the electronic files of the full mechanical coordination drawings eliminates the

requirement to modify the Contract Drawings to incorporate the changes to piping and equip-

ment locations made during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining

methods.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 9

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty

brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,


E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall

thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.3 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongase-

ous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect site conditions before starting preparatory work and verify that actual conditions are

known and acceptable before starting work.

B. Inspect areas where piping and equipment will be installed and verify adequate space is availa-

ble for access, service and removal of equipment. Coordinate with the Work of other Sections.

C. Notify the Architect immediately when the removal of existing ceilings, walls, or obstructions

reveal conditions substantially different from the Contract Documents.

3.2 PREPARATION



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 10

A. Perform coordination with the work of other Sections and prepare composite coordination draw-

ings as specified in Div. 01 section Project Management and Coordination before starting instal-

lation work of this section.

B. Verify points of connection to existing systems before proceeding with any related installation

work.

3.3 SYSTEM SHUTDOWNS

A. Coordination shutdowns of existing systems with the Owner and submit a written request at

least ten working days in advance. Minimize system shut downs as much as possible. Submit a

list of all effected areas, the proposed work to be performed, and the expected length of the

shut-down including time for re-testing.

B. Provide temporary services to maintain active system during extended shut-downs as required

for demolition and construction phasing.

3.4 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 1 Sections "Cutting and Patching" and "Alteration Project Proceedures" for

general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. A drill stop shall be used on all core drilling applications.

C. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated

to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or

plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or

compatible piping material.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug re-

maining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork

material.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment

operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove

equipment and deliver to Owner.

D. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, re-

move damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and

quality.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 11

3.5 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying pip-

ing systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe, calculate friction loss,

expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to lay-

out are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms

and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pres-

sure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 12

g. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with pol-

ished chrome-plated finish.

h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed hinge and set screw or spring clips.

2. Existing Piping: Use the following:

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring

clips.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-

brass type with chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass

type with chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with pol-

ished chrome-plated finish.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,

and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or

other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron

sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is speci-

fied.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space be-

tween sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).

b. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to

extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 7

Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or

pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Re-

fer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

N. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

O. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in re-

quirements.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 13

3.6 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specify-

ing piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assem-

bly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and weld-

ing operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service applica-

tion. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Grooved joints: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's (Victaulic) guidelines and recom-

mendations. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for

the intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be supplied by Victaulic. Grooved end shall be

clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove

for proper gasket sealing. A Victaulic factory trained field representative (direct employee)

shall provide on-site training to contractor's field personnel in the installation of grooved piping

products. Factory trained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Con-

tractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

1. Install the Victaulic AGS piping system in accordance with the latest Victaulic installa-

tion instructions. Use Victaulic grooving tools with AGS roll sets to groove the pipe.

Follow Victaulic guidelines for tool selection and operation. Coupling installation shall

be complete when visual metal-to-metal contact is reached. AGS products shall not be

installed with standard grooved end pipe or components. Installing AGS products in



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 14

combination with standard grooved end products could result in joint separation and/or

leakage.

J. Split-Sleeve Coupling Joints: The contractor shall inspect each coupling to insure that there are

no damaged portions of the coupling. Particular attention should be paid to the sealing

pad/sealing plate area. Before installation, each coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned of any

foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times thereaf-

ter. Wrenches used shall be of a size and type recommended by the manufacturer. Bolts and

studs shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform gasket compression between the coupling and

the body of the pipe with all bolts or studs tightened approximately the same amount. Final

tightening shall be done by hand (no air impact wrenches) and is complete when the coupling is

in uniform contact around the circumference of the pipe.

3.7 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final

connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of

dissimilar metals.

3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping ma-

terials of dissimilar metals.

3.8 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are

not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and

components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of

components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other

installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.9 PAINTING

A. Painting of mechanical systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 9 Section

"Painting”.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 15

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and

procedures to match original factory finish.

3.10 ACCESS PANELS

A. Access Panels: Comply with Section 08305.

B. Furnish access panels for installation under other sections to allow access to mechanical equip-

ment and devices installed under Division 23. Furnish access panels for mechanical devices in-

stalled behind permanent construction such as gypsum wall board partitions and ceilings or

concrete masonry walls and partitions.

C. Mechanical devices that require access include, but are not necessarily limited to; valves,

cleanouts, air release valves; water hammer arrestors, coils, volume and control dampers, varia-

ble frequency drives.

D. Access panels shall be large enough to provide access for maintenance and removal of mechan-

ical devices.

3.11 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.12 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equip-

ment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.



TRO No. 2017021


230100 - 16

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 230100



TRO No. 2017021

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

230513 - 1

SECTION 230513


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including DIVISION 01-GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Other Related Sections:

1. SECTION 230100- BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

3. SECTION 230529-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT .

4. SECTION 230548-VIBRATION AND SEISMIC BRACING FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT.

5. SECTION 230900-INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.

6. SECTION 230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA, SECTION 012500-SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SECTION

013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and

SECTION 230100-BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.



TRO No. 2017021


230513 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in

HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above

sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Premium efficiency, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

1. Motors which are 3-phase and 1 hp or larger (non-hermetic) must be NEMA design B

and meet the following minimum levels of nominal efficiency. The motors must be

tested in accordance with IEEE Standard 112 test method B and NEMA MG-1-12-53A.

2. Minimum Motor Efficiencies:

OPEN DRIP-PROOF (ODP) TOTALLY ENCLOSED FAN-COOLED

(TEFC)

Speed (RPM) Speed (RPM)

Motor 1200 1800 3600 Motor 1200 1800 3600

Size (HP) NEMA Nominal Efficiency Size (HP) NEMA Nominal Efficiency

1 82.5% 85.5% 77.0% 1 82.5% 85.5% 77.0%

1.5 86.5% 86.5% 84.0% 1.5 87.5% 86.5% 84.0%

2 87.5% 86.5% 85.5% 2 88.5% 86.5% 85.5%

3 88.5% 89.5% 85.5% 3 89.5% 89.5% 86.5%

5 89.5% 89.5% 86.5% 5 89.5% 89.5% 88.5%

7.5 90.2% 91.0% 88.5% 7.5 91.0% 91.7% 89.5%

10 91.7% 91.7% 89.5% 10 91.0% 91.7% 90.2%

15 91.7% 93.0% 90.2% 15 91.7% 92.4% 91.0%

20 92.4% 93.0% 91.0% 20 91.7% 93.0% 91.0%

25 93.0% 93.6% 91.7% 25 93.0% 93.6% 91.7%

30 93.6% 94.1% 91.7% 30 93.0% 93.6% 91.7%



TRO No. 2017021


230513 - 3

40 94.1% 94.1% 92.4% 40 94.1% 94.1% 92.4%

50 94.1% 94.5% 93.0% 50 94.1% 94.5% 93.0%

60 94.5% 95.0% 93.6% 60 94.5% 95.0% 93.6%

75 94.5% 95.0% 93.6% 75 94.5% 95.4% 93.6%

100 95.0% 95.4% 93.6% 100 95.0% 95.4% 94.1%

125 95.0% 95.4% 94.1% 125 95.0% 95.4% 95.0%

150 95.4% 95.8% 94.1% 150 95.8% 95.8% 95.0%

200 95.4% 95.8% 95.0% 200 95.8% 96.2% 95.4%

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. Separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

Provide all motors used with variable frequency drives with shaft grounding to eliminate

capacitively induced shaft currents or high frequency circulating currents.

G. Temperature Rise: Class B.

H. Insulation: Class F.

I. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.



TRO No. 2017021


230513 - 4

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

3. Electronically commutated motor.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor or electronically commutated

motor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




TRO No. 2017021

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING

230518 - 1

SECTION 230518


PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Other Related Work:

1. SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.

2. SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT.

3. SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING.

9. SECTION 230719 – HVAC PIPING INSULATION.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Escutcheons.

2. Floor plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, SECTION 012500-

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SECTION 013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES,

SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and SECTION 230100-BASIC

MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew

fastener.



TRO No. 2017021


230518 - 2

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and

spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

D. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and with

concealed hinge and setscrew.

E. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish, concealed and exposed-rivet

hinge, and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with

OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge or split-

plate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge.

d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.

g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished,

chrome-plated finish.

2. Escutcheons for Existing Piping to Remain:



TRO No. 2017021


230518 - 3

a. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated

finish.

b. Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet

hinge.

c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass

type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting brass type

with polished, chrome-plated finish.

e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with

concealed or exposed-rivet hinge.

f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed

or exposed-rivet hinge.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD

that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping and Relocated Existing Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping to Remain: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.




TRO No. 2017021


230518 - 4

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING

230519 - 1

SECTION 230519


PART 1 - GENERAL





1. SECTION 230100-BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.


EQUIPMENT.

3. SECTION 230900-INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.

4. SECTION 230593-TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.

5. SECTION 232113-HYDRONIC PIPING.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermometers.

2. Gages.

3. Test plugs.

4. Flowmeters.

B. Flowmetering devices shall be provided for the following services:

1. Chilled water

2. Condenser water

3. Condenser water make-up

4. Condenser water blow down

C. All of the flowmetering devices shall be capable of being tied into the Building Management

System.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 2

C. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and

maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Trerice, H. O. Co.

b. Weiss Insturments, Inc.

c. Palmer-Wahl Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.

3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch (229-mm) nominal size.

4. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.

5. Tube Background: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C.

6. Window: Glass or plastic.

7. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud.

b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

8. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

9. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 SEPARABLE SOCKETS

A. Description: Fitting with protective socket for installation in threaded pipe fitting to hold fixed

thermometer stem.

1. Material: Brass, for use in copper piping.

2. Material: Stainless steel, for use in steel piping.

3. Extension-Neck Length: Nominal thickness of 2 inches (50 mm), but not less than thick-

ness of insulation. Omit extension neck for sockets for piping not insulated.

4. Insertion Length: To extend to center of pipe.

5. Heat-Transfer Fluid: Oil or graphite.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 3

2.3 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:


2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: Brass

4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: Stainless Steel

5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.

6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,)

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw

threads.

8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.

10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.

11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer

connection.

12. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.4 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


following:

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.

b. Ashcroft Inc.

c. Ernst Flow Industries.

d. Flo Fab Inc.

e. Marsh Bellofram.

f. Miljoco Corporation.

g. Noshok.

h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.

i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.

j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.

k. Trerice, H. O. Co.

l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

m. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.

o. Winters Instruments - U.S.


3. Case: aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal diameter.

4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 4

5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1

pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.

7. Dial: Non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa.

8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

9. Window: Glass or plastic.

10. Ring: Stainless steel.

11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1

pipe threads and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on

insulated piping.

B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15) pipe

threads.

C. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.6 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. Miljoco Corporation.

3. National Meter, Inc.

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

6. Trerice, H. O. Co.

7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include

extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) or NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).

F. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 5

2.7 TEST-PLUG KITS


following:

1. Flow Design, Inc.

2. Miljoco Corporation.

3. National Meter, Inc.

4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.

6. Trerice, H. O. Co.

7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and

carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of

diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.

C. Low-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-)

diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 25 to 125 deg F

(minus 4 to plus 52 deg C).

D. High-Range Thermometer: Small, bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2-inch- (25- to 51-mm-)

diameter dial and tapered-end sensing element. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 220 deg F

(minus 18 to plus 104 deg C).

E. Pressure Gage: Small, Bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3-inch- (51- to 76-mm-)

diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be at least 0 to 200 psig (0 to 1380 kPa).

F. Carrying Case: Metal or plastic, with formed instrument padding.

2.8 FLOWMETERS

A. Orifice Flowmeters:


following:

a. Spirax Sarco, Inc..

b. Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries.

c. Meriam Process Technologies.

d. Preso Meters; a division of Racine Federated Inc.

e. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc.

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and

conversion chart.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 6

3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system

served.

4. Sensor: Wafer-orifice-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation between

pipe flanges.

a. Construction: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and caps,

and calibrated nameplate.

b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).

c. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for

connected sensor and having 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings

and copper tubing for connecting to sensor.

a. Scale: Gallons per minute (Liters per second).

b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range

6. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons (liters).

7. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor and indicator.

8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.

B. Pitot-Tube Flowmeters:


following:

a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical.

b. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount.

c. Meriam Process Technologies.


e. TACO Incorporated.

f. Veris Industries, Inc.

2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator.


served.

4. Sensor: Insertion type; for inserting probe into piping and measuring flow directly in

gallons per minute (liters per second).

a. Construction: Stainless-steel probe of length to span inside of pipe, with integral

transmitter and direct-reading scale.



5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter.

6. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power connection.

7. Accuracy: Plus or minus 3 percent.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 7

8. Display: Shows rate of flow , with register to indicate total volume in gallons (liters).


C. Turbine Flowmeters:


following:


b. Data Industrial Corp.

c. EMCO Flow Systems; a division of Spirax Sarco, Inc.

d. ERDCO Engineering Corp.

e. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc.

f. Liquid Controls; a unit of IDEX Corporation.

g. McCrometer, Inc.

h. Midwest Instruments & Controls Corp.

i. ONICON Incorporated.

j. SeaMetrics, Inc.

k. Sponsler, Inc.; a unit of IDEX Corporation.



served.

4. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting into pipe fitting or for installing in piping and

measuring flow directly in gallons per minute (liters per second).

a. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or impeller.




6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.



D. Venturi Flowmeters:


following:


b. Gerand Engineering Co.

c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.


e. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc.

f. Victaulic Company.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 8

2. Description: Flowmeter with calibrated flow-measuring element, hoses or tubing, fittings,

valves, indicator, and conversion chart.


served.

4. Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping.

a. Construction: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings and

attached tag with flow conversion data.



d. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded.

e. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged or welded.

f. Flow Range: Flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range

of equipment or system served.

5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for

connected flowmeter element, and having 6-inch- (152-mm-) diameter, or equivalent, dial

with fittings and copper tubing for connecting to flowmeter element.

a. Scale: Gallons per minute (Liters per second).

b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range.


7. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor.


E. Vortex-Shedding Flowmeters:


following:


b. Eastech Flow Controls.

c. EMCO Flow Systems; a division of Spirax Sarco, Inc.

d. Emerson Process Management; Rosemount.

e. Endress+Hauser.

f. ISTEC Corporation.



served.

4. Sensor: Inline type; for installing between pipe flanges and measuring flow directly in

gallons per minute (liters per second).

a. Construction: Stainless-steel body, with integral transmitter and direct-reading

scale.




TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 9


d. Integral Transformer: For low-voltage power operation.


6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent for liquids and 0.75 percent for gases.



F. Ultrasonic Flowmeters:


following:

a. UTM10 Series, Spirax Sarco, Inc.

b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

c. Controlotron

2. Description: Ultrasonic Flowmeter clamp onto the outside of pipe with flow sensor,

transmitter, indicator, and connecting wiring.

3. Flow Sensor: Transit-time ultrasonic type with transmitter.

4. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.

5. Temperature: : 32-122 deg F (0-50 deg C).

6. Repeatability: 0.5% of reading.

7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons (liters).

8. Communication: BACNet MS/TP.

9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each Flow meter.

G. Electromagnetic Flowmeters:


following:

a. Spirax Sarco, Inc.

b. OMEGA Engineering

c. Onicon

2. Description: Electromagnetic Flowmeter designed to measure the flow of conductive

liquids in a closed pipe.

3. Signal converter can be installed integrally on the sensor or remote.

4. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.

5. Temperature: : 32-158 deg F (0-70 deg C).

6. Repeatability: 0.1% of reading.

7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons per minute.

8. Communication: BACNet MS/TP.

9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each Flow meter.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 10

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in

piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if

required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.

D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect

cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.

H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the

most readable position.

I. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).

K. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.

L. Install test plugs in piping tees.

M. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.

N. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements

and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

O. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.

P. Install wafer-orifice flowmeter elements between pipe flanges.

Q. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of

pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.

R. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 11

S. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.

T. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.

U. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller (on chilled water and condenser water

connections).

3. At each location shown on the Drawings.

V. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.

2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection.

3. Suction and discharge of each pump.

4. At each location shown on the Drawings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance

of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters.

C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters.

D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other DIVISION 23 SECTIONS. Drawings in-

dicate general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection re-

quirements:

1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and mainte-

nance.

2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters.



TRO No. 2017021


230519 - 12




TRO No. 2017021

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

230523 - 1

SECTION 230523


PART 1 - GENERAL



REQUIREMENTS specification sections, apply to this Section.


1. Section 230100 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.

2. Section 230529 - Hangers and Supports for hvac piping and equipment.

3. Section 230548 - Vibration and Seismic BRACING FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT.

4. Section 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND Control FOR HVAC.

5. Section 230593 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing FOR HVAC.

6. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze angle valves.

2. Bronze ball valves.

3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.

4. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves.

5. High pressure butterfly valves

6. Bronze swing check valves.

7. Iron swing check valves.

8. Silent (Wafer) check valves.

9. Bronze globe valves.

10. Cast iron globe valves.

11. Cast iron plug valves.

12. Chain wheels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 2

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Non-rising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic.

G. RS: Rising stem.

H. SWP: Steam working pressure.

I. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single

manufacturer.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.

2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.

3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

D. SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA, SECTION 012500-

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SECTION 013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES,

SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and 230100-BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS.QUALITY ASSURANCE


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 3

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to Part 3 valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system

pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated

F. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.

2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves .

4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

G. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or

disturbing insulation and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is

applied.

2. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

H. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.

2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.

3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 4

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:


following:

a. Hammond Valve.

b. Milwaukee Valve Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.

b. CWP Rating: 200 psig.

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.

d. Ends: Threaded.

e. Stem and Disc: Bronze.

f. Packing: Asbestos free.

g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:


following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

c. Hammond Valve.

d. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.

e. Milwaukee Valve Company.

f. NIBCO INC.

g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.

b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.

c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.

d. Body Design: Two piece.

e. Body Material: Bronze.

f. Ends: Threaded.



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 5

g. Seats: PTFE or TFE.

h. Stem: Stainless steel.

i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented.

j. Port: Full.

2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:


following:

a. ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.

b. American Valve, Inc.

c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.

d. Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp.

e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.

f. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

g. DeZurik Water Controls.

h. Hammond Valve.

i. Kitz Corporation.

j. Legend Valve.

k. Milwaukee Valve Company.

l. Mueller Steam Specialty; a division of SPX Corporation.

m. NIBCO INC.

n. Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.

o. Red-White Valve Corporation.

p. Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.

q. Sure Flow Equipment Inc.

r. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.


c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange.

d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.

e. Seat: EPDM.

f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.

g. Disc: Stainless steel.

2.5 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 6


following:

a. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc.

b. Shurjoint Piping Products.

c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products.

d. Victaulic Company.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.


c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron.

d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel.

e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron.

f. Seal: EPDM.

2.6 HIGH PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the fol-

lowing:

1. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-A):

a. Grinnell Corp. Figure LC-8281-3

b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. Figure 632LD-RS66-1

c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Figure LG-752-BS-3E

d. Victaulic – Vic 300 Masterseal Butterfly Valve (for use in grooved piping systems)

2. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-B):

a. Grinnell Corp. Figure LC-8282-3

b. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. Figure 632LD-RS66-1

c. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. Figure LG-722-BS-3E

d. Victaulic – Vic 300 Masterseal Butterfly Valve (for use in grooved piping systems)

B. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-A): MSS SP-67, 200-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi (1035- kPa)

maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron body, extended neck, 416 or 410 stain-

less-steel stem with upper and lower bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seat, lug style with bi-

directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-psig:

1. Disc Type: Aluminum-Bronze.

2. Operator: Standard lever handle with 10 position (minimum) memory stop.

C. Butterfly Valves Type (BTFY-B): MSS SP-67, minimum 150-psi (1380-kPa) CWP, 150-psi

(1035- kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron or ASTM A536 ductile iron



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 7

body, extended neck, 416 or 410 stainless-steel stem with upper and lower TFE bushings, resili-

ent EPDM seat, lug style with bi-directional shut-off capability and dead end service to 150-

psig:

1. Disc Type: Aluminum-Bronze.

2. Operator: Gear operator with handwheel and position indicator. Provide chain wheel op-

erators for valves installed over 96 inches above the floor.

2.7 CHECK VALVES


following:

1. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-A):

a. Grinnell Corp.

b. Jomar International – No. T-511

c. Stockham Valves & Fittings.

2. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-B):

a. Grinnell Corp. – Figure 6300A

b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division – Figure 373

c. Hammond Valve Corporation – Figure IR1124

d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co. – Figure 1790

e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. – Figure 2974

f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. – Figure G-931

g. Jenkins – Figure 624

h. Powell – Figure 559

i. Fairbanks – Figure 0702

3. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-C):

a. Grinnell Corp. – Figure 3370

b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division – Figure 76E

c. Hammond Valve Corporation – Figure IB952

d. Lunkenheimer/Cincinnati Valve Co. – Figure 624


f. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. – Figure B-375

g. Jenkins – Figure 962A

h. Powell – Figure 563-Y


4. Wafer Check Valves Type (SLT-A):




TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 8

b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. – Figure 14

c. Hammond Valve Corporation – Figure IB958

5. Wafer Check Valves Type (SLT-B):

a. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. – Figure 18

B. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-A): MSS SP-80; Class 125, 150-psi WSP; horizontal swing,

Y-pattern, ASTM B 62 cast-bronze body and cap, rotating bronze disc with teflon seat, threaded

end connections.

C. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-B): MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126

Class B cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze renewable disc, flanged end

connections.

D. Swing Check Valves Type (SWG-C): MSS SP-80; Class 300, 600-psi CWP; horizontal swing,

Y-pattern, ASTM B 61 bronze body and cap, regrinding type, renewable bronze disc with

bronze seat, threaded end connections:

E. Silent (Wafer) Check Valves Type (SLT-A): Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron

body, bronze disc, stainless-steel set screws and springs, Bronze bushings, installed between

flanges.

F. Silent (Wafer) Check Valves Type (SLT-B): Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 48 cast-iron

globe style body, renewable bronze disc and seat, stainless-steel pins and springs, bronze

bushings, installed between flanges.

2.8 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bronze globe valves by one of

the following:

1. Globe Valves Type (GLB-A):


b. Crane Company; Valves and Fitting Division. – Figure 7-TF

c. Hammond Valve Corporation. – Figure IB413T

d. Cincinnati Valve Co. – Figure 123


f. NIBCO Inc. – Figure T-235Y

g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. – Figure B-22-T

h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves – Figure 106-A-2

i. Powell – Figure 150

j. Fairbanks – Figure 4195-3

2. Globe Valves Type (GLB-B):



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 9


b. Crane Co, Crane Valve Group, Crane Valves – Figure 362E

c. Hammond Valve Corporation. – Figure IB412


e. NIBCO Inc. – Figure T-275-B

f. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. – Figure B-66

g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves – Figure 1103

h. Powell – Figure 120


B. Globe Valves Type (GLB-A): MSS SP-80; Class 150, 300-psi (2070-kPa) CWP; ASTM B 62

cast-bronze body and screwed bonnet, rubber, bronze, or Teflon disc, silicon bronze-alloy stem,

Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze nut, threaded end connections; and with aluminum or

malleable-iron hand-wheel.

C. Globe Valves Type (GLB-B): MSS SP-80; Class 300, 600-psi CWP; ASTM B 61 bronze body

and screwed bonnet, bronze disc and seat, silicon bronze-alloy stem, renewable seat rings,

threaded end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron hand-wheel.

2.9 CAST IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron globe valves by one

of the following:

1. Globe Valves Type (GLB-C):

a. Grinnell Corp. – Figure 6200A

b. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves – Figure 351

c. Hammond Valve Corporation. – Figure IR116


e. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. – Figure F2981

f. NIBCO Inc. – Figure F-718-B

g. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. – Figure G-512

h. Crane Co., Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves – Figure 613

i. Powell – Figure 241

j. Fairbanks – Figure 0131

B. Globe Valves Type (GLB-C): MSS SP-85, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM A 126 Class B

cast-iron body and bolted bonnet with bronze fittings, renewable bronze seat and disc, brass-

alloy stem, outside screw and yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with cast-iron follower

flanged end connections; and with ASTM A 126 Class B cast-iron hand-wheel.



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 10

2.10 CAST-IRON PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron plug valves by one

of the following:

1. Plug Valves Type (PLG-A):

a. Grinnell Corp.

b. DeZurik.

c. NIBCO Inc.

B. Plug Valves Type (PLG-A): MSS SP-78, 175-psi (1200-kPa) CWP, ASTM A 126 cast-iron

body and bonnet, cast-iron plug, Teflon packing, flanged end connections:

1. Operator: Gear operator with hand-wheel and position indicator.

2.11 CHAINWHEELS


following:

1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co.

2. Roto Hammer Industries.

3. Trumbull Industries.

B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain.

1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve.

2. Attachment: For connection to ball and butterfly valve stems.

3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for

valve. Include zinc coating.

4. Chain: Hot-dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other

conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 11

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove

special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and

handling.

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper

size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is

suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for butterfly valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches

above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position with hinge pin level.

2. Center-Guided and Plate-Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between

flanges.

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but

before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 12

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves.

2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type.

3. Throttling Service: Globe or angle valves.

4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with

spring or iron, center-guided, metal or resilient-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves

with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-

end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below.

4. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

5. For Grooved-End Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Non-Potable Water Systems (Cold Water Make-up): Use valve types according to the

following schedule:

NON-POTABLE WATER SERVICE

Maximum Temperature - 150F

Maximum Pressure (1/2”-12”) – 150 psig

Type of Valve

Size

Specification

Valve Type

Application Notes

Gate Valve -- -- Not Used

Ball Valve ½”-4” BLV-A Throttling and Isolation

Globe Valve ½”-2” GLB-A Bypass

Swing Check Valve ½”-2” SWG-A Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping

Silent (Wafer) Check 2½”-12” SLT-B Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.

NOTE 1: Balancing valves ½”-2” and balancing valves required at terminal equipment

shall be calibrated balancing valves as specified in Division 15 Section-

“Hydronic Piping”.

B. Condenser Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:



TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 13

CONDENSER WATER SERVICE



Maximum Pressure (14”-24”) – 125 psig

Type of Valve

Size

Specification

Valve Type

Application Notes



Butterfly Valve 6” BTFY-A Isolation

Plug Valve 2½”-10” PLG-A Balancing @ Pump Disch.

Swing Check Valve 2½”-12” SWG-B Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping


C. Chilled Water Systems: Use valve types according to the following schedule:

CHILLED WATER SERVICE



Maximum Pressure (14”-24”) – 125 psig

Type of Valve

Size

Specification

Valve Type

Application Notes



Butterfly Valve 6” BTFY-A Isolation

Butterfly Valve 8”-12” BTFY-B Isolation

Globe Valve ½”-2” GLB-A ATC Modulation and Bypass

Globe Valve 2½”-10” GLB-C ATC Modulation and Bypass

Plug Valve 2½”-10” PLG-A Balancing @ Pump Disch. (Note 1)

Swing Check Valve ½”-2” SWG-A Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping

Swing Check Valve 2½”-12” SWG-B Prevent Flow Reversal in Piping

Silent (Wafer) Check ½”-2” SLT-A Prevent Flow Reversal @ Pump Disch.


NOTE 1: Balancing valves ½”-2” and balancing valves required at terminal equipment

shall be calibrated balancing valves as specified in Division 15 Section-

“Hydronic Piping”.




TRO No. 2017021


230523 - 14

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230529 - 1

SECTION 230529


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including DIVISION 01–GENERAL



1. DIVISION 05-METALS, SECTION 055000-METAL FABRICATIONS.

2. DIVISION 23, SECTION 230548-VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

3. DIVISION 23, SECTION 233113-METAL DUCTS

4. DIVISION 23, SECTION 230553-IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT

5. DIVISION 23, SECTION 232113-HYDRONIC PIPING.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Metal pipe hangers and supports.

2. Trapeze pipe hangers.

3. Metal framing systems.

4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.

5. Fastener systems.

6. Pipe stands.

7. Equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand

the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according

to ASCE/SEI 7.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 2

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting

combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of

supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and

installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for

components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.

2. Metal framing systems.

3. Pipe stands.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance

requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified

professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

DATA, SECTION 012500-SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SECTION 013300-SUBMITTAL

PROCEDURES, SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and SECTION 230100-

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to

AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 3

for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for this Project in

material, design, and extent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc.

2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports.

3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

5. Empire Industries, Inc.

6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc.

8. Grinnell Corp.

9. GS Metals Corp.

10. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

11. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

12. PHS Industries, Inc.

13. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

B. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

C. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.

2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to

support bearing surface of piping.

3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel.

D. Copper Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated

components.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 4

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from

structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-

bolts.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems:


following:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit.

b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.

c. Flex-Strut Inc.

d. GS Metals Corp.

e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple

parallel pipes.

3. Standard: MFMA-4.

4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with inturned lips.

5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel

slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.

6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.

7. Metallic Coating: Zinc

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


following:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.

2. Clement Support Services.

3. ERICO International Corporation.

4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

5. PHS Industries, Inc.

6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.

8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.

9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 5

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I

calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) minimum

compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I

calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) minimum

compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below

ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless- steel anchors, for use in

hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufactures:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.

b. Empire Industries, Inc.

c. Hilti, Inc.

d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.

e. MKT Fastening, LLC.

f. Powers Fasteners.

2.6 PIPE STANDS

A. Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

b. MIRO Industries.

B. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of

manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

C. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped

cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 6

D. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller, for roof

installation without membrane penetration.

E. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for

roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Base: Stainless steel.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods.

4. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

F. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand:

1. Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for

roof installation without membrane penetration.

2. Bases: One or more; plastic.

3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.

4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.

5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

G. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe supports made from structural-

steel shapes, continuous-thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof

curb.

2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-

steel shapes.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and

nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,

supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building

structure.

B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange

for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated

trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or

install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe

hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being

supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and

support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on

smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and

mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See DIVISION 07, SECTION 077200 -

ROOF ACCESSORIES for curbs.

G. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

H. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

I. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping

systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of

expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

J. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 8

K. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional

attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)

and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is

placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

L. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses

from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

M. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed

maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

N. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through

insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield

insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services

piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is

indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields

shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-

distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch

(1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.

c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch

(1.52 mm) thick.

d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch

(1.91 mm) thick.

e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch

(2.67 mm) thick.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 9

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-

insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support

equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment

supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be

shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;

appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the

following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve

indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 10

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas

of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in DIVISION 09-FINISHES, SECTION

099100-PAINTING and SECTION 099600-HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and

equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in

piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will

not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in

direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports metal trapeze pipe hangers and metal framing

systems and attachments for general service applications.

F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile

environment applications.

G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and

tubing.

H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in

piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or

insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to DN 750).

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F (566

deg C), pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24 (DN 100 to DN 600), requiring up to 4 inches (100 mm)

of insulation.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 11

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of

pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36 (DN 20 to DN 900), requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4

inches (100 mm) of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to

NPS 24 (DN 15 to DN 600) if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 15 to

DN 100), to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of

noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8 (DN 20 to DN 200).

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary

pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,

stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8 (DN 15 to DN 200).

10. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of


11. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of


12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30 (DN 15 to

DN 750).

13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.

14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100 to

DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel

plate.

15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36 (DN 100

to DN 900), with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-

steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes

NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 (DN 65 to DN 900) if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30 (DN 25 to

DN 750), from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction

might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to

NPS 24 (DN 65 to DN 600), from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion

and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 (DN 50 to

DN 1050) if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but

vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 (DN 50

to DN 600) if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might

occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 12

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to

NPS 30 (DN 50 to DN 750) if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be

required in addition to expansion and contraction.

K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system

Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to

NPS 24 (DN 24 to DN 600).

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4

to NPS 24 (DN 20 to DN 600) if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches (150 mm) for heavy

loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.

4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments.

5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F (49 to 232 deg C) piping

installations.

M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend

pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist

construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,

channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.

7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge.

8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.

9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads.

10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.

11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 13

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb (340 kg).

b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb (680 kg).

c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb (1360 kg).

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system


1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with

insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping

system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with

springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from

trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress

from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include

auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These

supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.

b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.

c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.



TRO No. 2017021


230529 - 14

P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

Q. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections.

R. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building

attachments where required in concrete construction.




TRO No. 2017021

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230548 - 1

SECTION 230548


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including apply to this Section.


1. SECTION 230100-BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.


EQUIPMENT.

3. SECTION 232113-HYDRONIC PIPING.

4. SECTION 230719-HVAC PIPING INSULATION.

5. SECTION 230716-HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

6. DIVISION 03, SECTION 033000 – CONCRETE for concrete bases and inertia pads.

7. DIVISION 07, SECTION 077200 – ROOF ACCESSORIES for related roof mounted

equipment.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.

2. Isolation mounts.

3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.

4. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators.

5. Housed spring mounts.

6. Elastomeric hangers.

7. Spring hangers.

8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.

9. Pipe riser resilient supports.

10. Resilient pipe guides.

11. Seismic snubbers.

12. Restraining braces and cables.

13. Steel and inertia vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 2

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Wind-Restraint Loading: Basic Wind speed and Building Classification Category shall be

obtained from the Structural Drawings and Specifications.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

b. Component Response Modification Factor: Refer to the equipment schedule in

Part 3 of this section for each piece of equipment.

c. Component Amplification Factor: Refer to the equipment schedule in Part 3 of

this section for each piece of equipment.

2. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): Ss=0.201g.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: S1=0.093g.

C. Shall be capable of accepting, without failure, one-half "G" external forces, one "G" for life

safety equipment. Shall maintain the equipment in a captive position, and not short circuit

isolation during normal operating conditions. Isolators shall have provisions for bolting and

welding to the structure.

D. Attachment plates to be cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, beam clamps, etc. that

may be required for seismic compliance, shall be provided by DIVISION 23.

E. Housekeeping pad attachment shall be designed and certified by this section. Materials and

labor required shall be by the concrete section of these specifications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation

device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of seismic-restraint component used.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 3

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and

rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with

requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and

sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and

operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic and wind

restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment

mounted outdoors.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion

and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring

deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been

examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and

rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment,

and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic and Wind-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind

restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to

the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and

spacing. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and

values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate

association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint

details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Pre-approval and Evaluation

Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,

showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or

calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and

equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and

seismic restraints.




TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 4

E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

DATA, SECTION 012500-SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SECTION 013300-

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, SECTION 017700-CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as

defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural

Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall

bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or

preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum

seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on

calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing

are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-

restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete, re-

inforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Type A: Spring Isolators : Freestanding, laterally stable, open spring isolators. Basis of Design:

Mason Ind. Type SLF.

1. Having a minimum OD to OH of 0.8:1. Corrosion resistance with:

2. Springs cadmium plated or electro-galvanized.

3. Hardware cadmium plated.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 5

4. All other metal parts hot-dip galvanized.

5. Reserve deflection (from loaded to solid height) of 50% of rated deflection.

6. Minimum ¼" thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside, unless designed otherwise.

7. Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel.

8. Non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural frequency.

9. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at

rated load.

10. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.

11. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.

12. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformtion

or failure.

13. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside.

14. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig (3447 kPa).

15. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to

fasten and level equipment.

B. Type B: Spring isolator shall be the same as Type A with the following additional features:

1. Restrained Spring Isolators : Freestanding, steel, open spring isolators with seismic or limit-

stop restraint.

2. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight

being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, neoprene or

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and

leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

3. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.


rated load.


6. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. Overload Capacity:

Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure.

7. Built-in vertical limit stops with minimum ¼" clearance under normal operation.

8. Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment.

9. Capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment installation. Installed

and operating heights shall be identical.

10. Adjustable and removable spring pack with separate neoprene isolation pad.

11. Housing rated to accept one "G" Acceleration.

12. Mason Ind. Type SLR.

NOTE: Type B spring isolator must be bolted or welded to the structure.

C. Type C: Housed Spring Mounts : Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.

1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic

restraint.

2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 6

3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) travel up or down

before contacting a resilient collar.

4. Spring element (Type A) seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup incorporating a rod

isolation bushing.

5. Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup.

6. When used on ductwork, provide eyebolts for attachment to duct straps.

7. Spring diameter and hanger box lower hole size shall allow 30 degree hanger rod

misalignment - Mason Ind. Type 30, W30.

NOTE: MUST BE USED WITH SEISMIC RESTRAINT TYPE III

D. Type D: Elastomeric Hangers : Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant

elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods.

Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Type D: SAME AS SEISMIC RESTRAINT TYPE IV.

E. Type E: Spring Hangers : Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and

insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for

a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing

isolation efficiency.


rated load.



5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.

7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and

support spring coil.

8. Molded (min. 1-3/4" thick) neoprene element with projecting busing lining the rod clearance

hole. Static deflection at rated load shall be a minimum of 0.35".

9. Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting capable of supporting equipment up

to four times the rated capacity of the element - Mason Ind. Type HD.

F. Type F: Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop :

1. Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in

compression and with a vertical-limit stop.

2. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum

of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation

efficiency.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 7


rated load.



6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

7. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.

8. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower threaded

rod.

9. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support spring

coil.

NOTE: SEISMIC RESTRAINT TYPE III must be used with Type E hanger rod isolator.

G. Type G: Combination Spring/Elastomer hanger rod isolator.

1. Spring and neoprene elements in a steel retainer box with the features as described for Type

C and E isolators - Mason Ind. Type 30N.

NOTE: SEISMIC RESTRAINT Type III must be used with Type F hanger rod isolator.

2.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS

A. Type I: Shall comply with general characteristics of spring isolator Type A with the following

additional features. Isolator shall incorporate snubbing restraint in all directions, and be capable

of supporting equipment at fixed elevations during installation, and have a one "G" rating.

Cast or aluminum housings, except ductile iron, are not acceptable - Mason Ind. type SSLFH.

B. Type II: Each corner or side of equipment base shall incorporate a seismic restraint having a

minimum of 5/8" thick, all directional resilient pad limit stop. Restraints shall be fabricated of

plate, structural members or square metal tubing. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. Isolator

shall have a one "G" acceleration rating - Mason Ind. Type Z-1011 or Z-1225.

C. Type III: Multiple metal cable type with approved fastening devices to equipment and structure.

System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural members using two sided beam clamps or

appropriately designed inserts for concrete. All parts of the system including cables, and

excluding fasteners are to be of a single supplier to assure seismic compliance - Mason Ind.

Type SCB Seismic Restraining System

D. Type IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator (min. 0.3") encased in ductile iron or steel casing.

Isolator shall have one "G" acceleration rating - Mason Ind. Type BR or RBA.

E. Type V: Non-isolated equipment shall be field bolted or welded (powder shots not acceptable)

to the structures as required to meet seismic forces. Bolt diameter, imbedment data, and/or

weld length must be shown in certified calculations.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 8

2.3 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. All curbs and roof rails are to be bolted or welded to the building steel or concrete deck to at

certain acceleration criteria and shall be wind restrained for 100 mph wind loads.

B. Type B-1: Integral Structural Steel Base.

1. Reinforced as required to prevent base flexure at equipment startup and misalignment of

driver and driven units.

2. Centrifugal fan bases shall be complete with motor slide rails and drilled for driver and driven

units.

3. Height saving brackets as required to reduce operating height.

4. Member depth shall be a minimum of 1/10 of the longest unsupported span - Mason Ind.

Type M, WF

NOTE: RESTRAINT TYPE I, II or IV must be used with Type B-1 base.

C. Type B-2: Concrete Inertia Base

1. Rectangular structural concrete forms for floating foundations. Base for split case pumps

shall be large enough to support elbows. The base depth shall be a minimum of 1/12 the

longest span, but not less than 6" or greater than 14".

2. Forms shall include concrete reinforcement consisting of ½" bars or angles welded in place

on 6" centers both ways. A layer 1½" above the bottom and an additional top layer of rein-

forcing for all bases exceeding 120" in one direction.

3. Isolators shall be set into pocket housings which are an integral part of the base construction

and set at the proper height to maintain 2" clearance below the base. Base shall be furnished

with templates and anchor bolt sleeves - Mason Ind. Type K, BMK, or KIPWF

NOTE: RESTRAINT TYPE I, II, or IV must be used with Type B-2 base.

.

D. Equipment Pads : Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform

loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and

factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene or rubber].

2. Type G: Pad type elastomer isolator.

3. 0.75" minimum thickness, 50 psi maximum loading, ribbed or waffled design.

4. Minimum 0.1" deflection.

5. 1/16" galvanized steel plate between multiple pad layers.

6. Load distribution plate where attachment to equipment bearing surface is less than

75% of the pad area. (Type "GM") Mason Ind. Type Super W pad.

NOTE: Bolting required for seismic compliance. Neoprene and duck washers and bushings

shall be provided to prevent short circuiting.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 9

I. Mounts : Double-deflection type, with molded, oil- resistant rubber, hermetically sealed

compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate

for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise

identify to indicate capacity range.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and

opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded

element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal

operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-

bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

J. Restrained Mounts : All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing,

oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and

attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-

bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. All connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of shut-off valves, horizontal and parallel

to shafts whenever possible for pumps and plate and frame heat exchangers.

B. Type FC-1: Flexible stainless steel hose.

1. Stainless steel hose and braid rated with 3:1 safety factor.

2. 2" and smaller with male nipples, 2-1/2" and larger with fixed steel flanges.

3. Lengths as follows:

1/2 x 9 2-1/2 x 12 10 x 26

3/4 x 10 3 x 14 12 x 28

1 x 11 4 x 15 14 x 30

1-1/4 x 12 5 x 19 16 x 32

1-1/2 x 13 6 x 20

2 x 14 8 x 22

4. Mason Ind. Type BSS, or as approved.

D. Type FC-3: Unbraided exhaust hose.

1. Low pressure stainless steel angularly corrugated with flanged ends - Mason Ind. Type

SDL-RF, or as approved.

2. Maximum temperature of 1500 degrees F.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 10


2-1/2 x 15 8 x 22

3 x 16 10 x 26

4 x 17 12 x 28

5 x 18 14 x 30

6 x 19 16 x 32

E. Type FC-4: Bronze braided flexible hose.

1. Bronze hose and braid - Mason Ind. Type BFF, or as approved.

2. Rated with a minimum 3:1 safety factor. (Minimum 150 PSI).

3. Copper tube ends.


1/8 x 7-1/2 3/4 x 11-1/2 3 x 27

1/4 x 8-1/4 1-1/4 x 14-3/4 3-1/2 x 32

3/8 x 9 1-1/2 x 17 4 x 33

1/2 x 9-3/4 2 x 20 5 x 41

5/8 x 10 2-1/2 x 2 46 x 48

2.5 PIPE RISERS AND PIPE GUIDES

A. Pipe Riser Resilient Support : All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes

separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene

vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a

maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig (3.45 MPa) and for equal resistance in all

directions.

B. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve

arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick neoprene. Where

clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow

vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall

be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall

be capable of motion to meet location requirements..

2.7 2.9 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Specify field-painting requirements in DIVISION 09, SECTION 099100-PAINTING. Verify

compatibility of factory finishes with field-applied coats.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

C. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment

before shipping.

2. Powder coating on springs and housings.

3. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use.

4. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 11

5. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control devices

to indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic[- and wind]-control

devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions

affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application

by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings

to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads

within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in DIVISION 07, SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES for

installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations and with the requirements

in DIVISION 03, SECTION 033000 – CONCRETE for concrete bases and inertia pads.

B. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping, or

ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.

C. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate

snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and

supporting structure.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 12

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

D. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.

2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet (12 m) o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet (24 m) o.c.

3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet (3.7 m).

E. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

F. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

G. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media between anchor bolts and mounting hole in concrete base.

H. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

I. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

J. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or

drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to

which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to

installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole

and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air

pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 13

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or

branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate

with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one

supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in

DIVISION 23, SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING for piping flexible connections.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to

restrained component (unless post connection testing has been approved), and with at

least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary

load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by

Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device.

6. Measure isolator restraint clearance.

7. Measure isolator deflection.

8. Verify snubber minimum clearances.

9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height.

After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during

normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.



TRO No. 2017021


230548 - 14

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.7 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment Schedule

Eq

uip

mt

Ta

g

Equipment Type

Eq

uip

men

t, P

ipe, D

uct,

Ta

nk

&

Fa

n S

izes

Location OR

Quantity

ASHRAE Requirements Notes

Slab on Grade Floors Above Grade &

Roof- 20-30 ft. Span)

Seis

mic

Rest

rain

t

*B

ase

Ty

pe

*Is

ola

tor

Ty

pe

Defl

ecti

on

*B

ase

Ty

pe

*Is

ola

tor

Defl

ecti

on

P- Pumps (End Suction) < 40 hp Flr Mounted B-2 B 0.75 B-2 B 1.50 Type II 2, 8, 13

P- Pumps 50-125 hp Flr Mounted B-2 B 0.75 B-2 B 2.50 Type II 2, 8, 13

CH- Chiller (Centrifugal) All Flr Mounted B-7 0.25 B-7 1.50 Type V 10, 12, 13

CT- Cooling Tower (Induced Draft) All B-4 B 2.50 Type I 2

Pipe Chilled Water Piping 1-3 in. Suspended F 1.50 Type III 4, 5

Pipe Chilled Water Piping 4-8 in. Suspended F 1.50 Type III 4, 5

Pipe Chilled Water Piping > 10 in. Suspended F 1.50 Type III 4, 5

Pipe Condenser Water Piping 1-3 in. Suspended F 1.50 Type III 4, 5

Pipe Condenser Water Piping 4-8 in. Suspended F 1.50 Type III 4, 5

Pipe Condenser Water Piping > 10 in. Suspended F 1.50 Type III 4, 5

Pipe HW Heating, Preheat and Reheat

Piping

1-3 in. Suspended F 1.50 Type III 4, 5




TRO No. 2017021

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230553 - 1

SECTION 230553


PART 1 - GENERAL




B. DIVISION 23 SECTIONS:

1. SECTION - 230100 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.

2. SECTION - 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING.

3. SECTION - 233113 METAL DUCTS.

4. All HVAC Equipment.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.

2. Warning signs and labels.

3. Pipe labels.

4. Duct labels.

5. Stencils.

6. Valve tags.

7. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification

material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed

content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.



TRO No. 2017021


230553 - 2

F. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE




1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of

surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness:Aluminum, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) or anodized aluminum, 0.032-

inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment

hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm),

and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary

lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

a. Label Content: Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.

b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.

c. Labels of tested compliances.

d. Equipment designation as indicated on the plans and schedules.

B. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers

where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section

number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in

operation and maintenance data.



TRO No. 2017021


230553 - 3

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8

inch (3.2 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White .

C. Background Color: Red .

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and

proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-

thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification

instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering

indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially covercircumference

of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate

both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.



TRO No. 2017021


230553 - 4

2.4 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16

inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2

by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

D. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and

proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-

thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

E. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

F. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

G. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or

abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both

directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.

2.5 STENCILS

A. Stencils: Prepared with letter sizes according to ASME A13.1 for piping; minimum letter

height of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for ducts; and minimum letter height of 3/4 inch (19 mm) for

access panel and door labels, equipment labels, and similar operational instructions.

1. Stencil Material: Fiberboard or metal.

2. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel black unless otherwise indicated. Paint may

be in pressurized spray-can form.

3. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel in colors according to ASME A13.1 unless

otherwise indicated.

2.6 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system

abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch (0.8-mm) minimum thickness, and having predrilled or

stamped holes for attachment hardware.



TRO No. 2017021


230553 - 5

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate

valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve

(room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for

identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.7 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card

stock with matte finish suitable for writing.

1. Size: Approximately 4 by 7 inches (100 by 178 mm).

2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire.

3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO

NOT OPERATE."

4. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification

devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and

encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe

labels, at Installer's option. Install stenciled pipe labels with painted, color-coded bands or

rectangles, complying with ASME A13.1, on each piping system.

1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.

2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking.



TRO No. 2017021


230553 - 6

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;

machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and

exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.

3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible

enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet

(7.6 m) in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background.

2. Condenser-Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background

3. Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color

codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts.

2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts.

3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust.

B. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels, showing service and flow direction, may be

provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option, if lettering larger than 1

inch (25 mm) high is needed for proper identification because of distance from normal location

of required identification.

C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at

maximum intervals of 50 feet (15 m) in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by

removable ceiling system.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within

factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering



TRO No. 2017021


230553 - 7

hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use

fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and

with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Chilled Water2 inches (50 mm), round.

b. Condenser Water: 2 inches (50 mm), round.

3.6 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where

required.

3.7 VALVE TAG APPLICATION TABLE

A. All piping systems listed below is for both supply and return in each category.

HVAC Hydronic Systems Valve Tag Application Table

HVAC HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

TAG SIZE

TAG SHAPE

TAG COLOR

LETTER

COLOR

SYSTEM ID

Chilled Water 2” Round Green White CHW

Condenser Water 2” Round Blue White CW

Hot Water 1-1/2” Square Yellow Black HW

Chemical Treatment 1-1/2” Square Yellow Black CTW

Drain Pipe 1-1/2” Round Yellow Black D

Non-Potable Cold Wtr Make-up 2” Round Green Black NPCW




TRO No. 2017021


230553 - 8

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 1

SECTION 230593


PART 1 - GENERAL




B. Applies to all DIVISION 23, Systems and Equipment.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.

c. Primary-secondary hydronic systems.

B. The scope of the TAB work for this project is to test, balance and adjust all systems and

equipment to achieve the design intent as shown in the Contract Documents. The TAB

subcontractor shall provide in the Final TAB Report the following information:

1. Air Supply, Air Return and Air Exhaust Inlets and Outlets.

a. The design CFM, the first test CFM, the adjustments made to each outlet to correct

insufficient or excess air quantities and the final air quantity result for each outlet.

2. Water Supply and Water Return.

a. The design GPM, the first test GPM, the adjustments made to correct

insufficient or excess water quantities and the final water quantity result at each

pump, balancing valve and at each piece of equipment.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation

that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified

in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB

strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. Certified TAB reports.

E. Sample report forms.

F. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.

3. Application.

4. Dates of use.

5. Dates of calibration.

H. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

DATA, SECTION 012500-SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES SECTION 013300-





TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 3


A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC, NEBB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC,

NEBB as a TAB technician.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to

develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field

supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and

location.

1. Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.

c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.

d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB

reports.

2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures

specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner.

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,

Section 5, "Instrumentation."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB

period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial

Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's

operations.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 4

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and

times.

B. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,

HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to

support and assist testing, adjusting, and balancing activities.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been

satisfactorily completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover

conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine project record documents.

C. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer

wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify

that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.

D. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

E. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions

for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and

assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects

that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or

part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when

installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment

performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in

AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."

Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 5

G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,

cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned

and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated

perforations.

K. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe

and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from

indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.

2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.

3. Instrumentation to be used.

4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.

3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.

4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.

5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.

6. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily

completed.

7. Water treatment is complete.

8. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.

9. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are functioning per the

sequence of operation.

10. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.

11. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in

discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers.

12. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 6

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained

in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance", , or NEBB's "Procedural Standards

for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the

minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness

as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with

requirements in DIVISION 23, SECTION 233300-AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES.

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,

coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to DIVISION 23, SECTION 230716-

HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION, DIVISION 23, SECTION 230713-HVAC DUCT

INSULATION and DIVISION 23, SECTION 230719-HVAC PIPING INSULATION.

D. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve

position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint

or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

E. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and

recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with

required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air

dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 7

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 233113-METAL

DUCTS.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by

fan manufacturer.

1. Measure total airflow.

a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements,

measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow.

2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and

upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct

restrictions.

3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus

actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments

to accommodate actual conditions.

4. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment

manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor

amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-

heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required

brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated

airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube

traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the

total airflow for that zone.

2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust

volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 8

3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to

adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written

instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of

indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and

the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated

quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the

Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end

of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct

variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the

general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.

3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent.

4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow.

5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal

valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.

7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.

8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-displacement

pumps:



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 9

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read

pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for

differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow

and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

A. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain approval from

Construction Manager or Commissioning Authority and comply with requirements in

DIVISION 23, SECTION 232123-HYDRONIC PUMPS.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the

pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve

until indicated water flow is achieved.

a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motors in overload

conditions.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the

system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake

horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual

amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are functioning as

designed.

C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves in fully open

position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.

D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop

relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5

percent greater than indicated flow.

G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.

2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated

flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 10

H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump

heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at

maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic

systems.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance the primary circuit flow first and then balance the secondary circuits.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.

3. Motor rpm.

4. Efficiency rating.

5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.

6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.

7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

8. Srevice factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying

from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper

operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,

serial number, and nameplate data.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of

indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller

installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller

manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design

conditions:



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 11

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow.

2. For water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure

drop, and water flow.

3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments

furnished by chiller manufacturer.

4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatts.

6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.

7. For air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data

including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR COOLING TOWERS

A. Shut off makeup water for the duration of the test, and verify that makeup and blowdown

systems are fully operational after tests and before leaving the equipment. Perform the

following tests and record the results:

1. Measure condenser-water flow to each cell of the cooling tower.

2. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures.

3. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of entering air.

4. Measure wet- and dry-bulb temperatures of leaving air.

5. Measure condenser-water flow rate recirculating through the cooling tower.

6. Measure cooling-tower spray pump discharge pressure.

7. Adjust water level and feed rate of makeup water system.

8. Measure flow through bypass.

9. Fan and motor operating data.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.

3. Check the refrigerant charge.

4. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.

5. Measure and record chilled water supply and return temperatures, water flow, and static

pressure in primary and secondary loop.

6. Measure and record chilled water supply and return temperatures, water flow, and static

pressure in North and South building loops.

7. Measure and record water flow and static pressure at

8. Measure and record the operating speed, water flow, static pressure, voltage, and

amperage of each pump.

9. Measure and record evaporator and condenser entering and leaving temperatures,

pressure drop, and water flow at each chiller. Measure and record Kilowatt input.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 12

10. Measure and record condenser water flow, entering and leaving temperatures to each cell

of the cooling tower.

11. Measure and record Cooling Towers sound levels at 5 locations as designated by the

Owner.

12. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is

to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are

affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated water flow of the renovated work to the measured existing water

flows.

2. If calculations increase or decrease the water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make

equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5

percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic

temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive

eight-hour days to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building

is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.15 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:

1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.

2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.

3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.

4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.

5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.

6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.

7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.

8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:

open, closed, or modulating.

9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 13

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and

variations from indicated conditions.

3.16 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to minus 10 percent.

2. Exhaust Air Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.

3. Cooling and Condenser Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.

3.17 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as

specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'

balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to

facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to

HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and

balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare biweekly progress reports to describe completed procedures,

procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems

found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each

building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.18 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections

for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the

certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves.

2. Fan curves.

3. Manufacturers' test data.

4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.

5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

product data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 14

1. Title page.

2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.

3. Project name.

4. Project location.

5. Architect's name and address.

6. Engineer's name and address.

7. Contractor's name and address.

8. Report date.

9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.

10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.

11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.

c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.

14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.

15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.

c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.

d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.

e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.

f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.

g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.

h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present

each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water flow rates.

3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.

4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.

5. Terminal units.

6. Balancing stations.

7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 15

b. Location.

c. Make and type.

d. Model number and size.

e. Manufacturer's serial number.

f. Arrangement and class.

g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.

c. Volts, phase, and hertz.

d. Full-load amperage and service factor.

e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore.

f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

g. Number, make, and size of belts.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

c. Fan rpm.

d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

F. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid

representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.

c. Traverse air temperature in deg F (deg C).

d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

e. Duct size in inches (mm).

f. Duct area in sq. ft. (sq. m).

g. Indicated air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s).

i. Actual air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s).

k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

G. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 16

a. System and air-handling unit identification.

b. Location and zone.

c. Apparatus used for test.

d. Area served.

e. Make.

f. Number from system diagram.

g. Type and model number.

h. Size.

i. Effective area in sq. ft. (sq. m).


a. Air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s).

c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in cfm (L/s).

d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s).

e. Final air flow rate in cfm (L/s).

f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s).

g. Space temperature in deg F (deg C).

H. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and

include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification.

b. Location.

c. Service.

d. Make and size.

e. Model number and serial number.

f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).

h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa).

i. Pump rpm.

j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm).

k. Motor make and frame size.

l. Motor horsepower and rpm.

m. Voltage at each connection.

n. Amperage for each phase.

o. Full-load amperage and service factor.

p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa).

b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm).



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 17

d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s).

e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa).

i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

j. Voltage at each connection.

k. Amperage for each phase.

I. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.

c. Application.

d. Dates of use.

e. Dates of calibration.

3.19 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check

measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance

readings documented in the final report.

2. Check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.

c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the reading

to the set point.

d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.

e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks verifies that

testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request

that a final inspection be made by Commissioning Authority.

2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the

presence of Commissioning Authority.

3. Owner or Commissioning Authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in

the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the

total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a

normal 8-hour business day.



TRO No. 2017021


230593 - 18

4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the

final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as

"FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total

measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be

considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB Work fails,

proceed as follows:

1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing

device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final

inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB

contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the

cost of the services from the original TAB contractor's final payment.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.20 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions

are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and

winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




TRO No. 2017021

HVAC PIPING INSULATION

230719 - 1

SECTION 230719


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including DIVISION 01 Specification

Sections, apply to this Section.



2. SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING.

3. SECTION 230518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING.

4. SECTION 230519 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR HVAC PIPING.

5. SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING.


EQUIPMENT.


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:

1. Chilled-water and brine piping indoors.

2. Condenser-water piping, outdoors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor

permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of

insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation.

3. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties.

4. Detail application of field-applied jackets.

5. Detail application at linkages of control devices.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 2

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing

product and intended use.

1. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).

2. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.

3. Jacket Materials for Pipe: 12 inches (300 mm) long by NPS 2 (DN 50).

4. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches (300 mm) square.

5. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation

materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include

dates of tests and test methods employed.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Comply with pertinent provisions in SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE



SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship

program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of

Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing

identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,

mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing

agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed

index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate

ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 3

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in

DIVISION 23, SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for

installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for

maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after

installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have

satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation

Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating

materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less

than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable

according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing

process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.

Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 4

a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.

b. Johns Manville; Microlite.

c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.

e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.

b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.

c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.

d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.

e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F (454 deg C) Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a

thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied

ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding

insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.




TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 5

a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.

c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70.

d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic

Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers,"

including 2004 Addenda.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,

Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.



Company; CP-82.



Company; 85-50.


2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California




2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with

MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when


B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.




TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 6

a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 30-80/30-90.

b. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric

perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82 deg C).

4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for outdoor use on below-ambient services.



Company; Encacel.



Company; 60-95/60-96.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm (0.033 metric perm) at 30-mil (0.8-

mm) dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 33 percent by volume and 46 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.

D. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.



Company; CP-10.



Company; 46-50.


e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms (1.2 metric perms) at 0.0625-inch

(1.6-mm) dry film thickness.


4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.

5. Color: White.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 7

2.5 SEALANTS

A. ASJ Flashing Sealants:



Company; CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.


5. Color: White.

6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when


7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California




2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When

factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a

removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;

complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005,

3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.

b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

c. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil- (0.025-mm-) thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper.

d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- (0.075-mm-) thick, heat-

bonded polyethylene and kraft paper.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 8

e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.

2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows.

3) Tee covers.

4) Flange and union covers.

5) End caps.

6) Beveled collars.

7) Valve covers.

8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.8 TAPES

A. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.

b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.

c. Compac Corporation; 120.

d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches (50 mm).

3. Thickness: 3.7 mils (0.093 mm).

4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch (1.1 N/mm) in width.

5. Elongation: 5 percent.

6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch (6.2 N/mm) in width.

2.9 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.

b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch (0.38

mm) thick, wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;

Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, wide with wing seal or closed seal.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept

metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 9

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) wide, stainless steel

or Monel.

C. Wire: [0.080-inch (2.0-mm) nickel-copper alloy soft-annealed, stainless steel.


following:

a. C & F Wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will

adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a

corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils (0.127 mm)

thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils (0.127 mm) thick if operating in a temperature range

between 140 and 300 deg F (60 and 149 deg C). Consult coating manufacturer for

appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300

deg F (0 and 149 deg C) with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for

appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with

requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with

stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 10

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;

free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required

for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install

accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or

dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with

adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,

supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.

2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper

and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to

insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation

material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over

jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet

and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both

edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 11

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with

longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.

Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches (50 mm) o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written

instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at

ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal

thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking

due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.

Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal

patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.

2. Testing agency labels and stamps.

3. Nameplates and data plates.

4. Manholes.

5. Handholes.

6. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof

penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below

top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through wall penetrations.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 12

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,

install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal

joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at

least 2 inches (50 mm).

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):

Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in DIVISION 07, SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION

FIRESTOPPING for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more

specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with

continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from

same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly

against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular

surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is

uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt

each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with

adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,

valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with

insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same

material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe

insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe

diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 13

cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and

replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable

insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor

barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.

Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe

insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a

mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for

above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the

mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric

and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and

unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation

facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match

size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,

test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape

insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating

cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the

following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same

thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe

insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation

from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe

insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-

steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide

the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of

mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached

insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over

adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover

and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating

cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a

smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed

surfaces with a metal jacket.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 14

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten

bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions

with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with

outward-clinched staples at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple

longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by

insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.

2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.

3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch (25 mm), and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections

of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation

materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when

available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to

valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams

and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 15

weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-

steel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.


A. Testing Agency: a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.


1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent

of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of

threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers,

two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations

of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,

General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals

noncompliance with requirements.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for

each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,

selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.

2. Underground piping.

3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Concealed:

1. None.



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 16

D. Piping, Exposed:

1. None.

3.11 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the

field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. Aluminum, Stucco Embossed: 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3.13 INTERIOR PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule: Unless otherwise

indicated, insulate all interior exposed and concealed chilled water piping according

to the Interior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule:

Interior Chilled Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule

Pipe Sizes (NPS)

Materials

Conductivity

(Btu×in/h×ft2×F)

Thickness (in inches)

Vapor

Barrier

Field-Applied

Jacket

<1 to 1½”

(Note 1)

Glass fiber 0.27 1½” Yes None

1½” to 4” Glass fiber 0.27 1½" Yes None

4” to 8” Glass fiber 0.27 1½” Yes None

> 8" Glass fiber 0.27 1½” Yes None

NOTE 1: Applies to runouts to individual terminal units not exceeding 12 feet in length.

B. Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule (40F to 90F): Unless otherwise

indicated, insulate the following interior exposed and concealed miscellaneous piping according

to the Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule:

1. Cold water make-up piping.

Interior Miscellaneous Piping Insulation Application Schedule (40F to 90F)



TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 17

Pipe Sizes (Copper)

Materials


Vapor

Barrier

Field-Applied

Jacket

< 1½” Glass fiber 1” Yes

≥1½” Glass fiber 1" Yes

3.14 EXTERIOR PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35F to 100F): Unless

otherwise indicated, insulate all exterior exposed and concealed condenser water piping according to

the Exterior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule:

Exterior Condenser Water Piping Insulation Application Schedule (35F to 100F)

Pipe Sizes (NPS)

Materials


Vapor

Barrier

Field-Applied

Jacket

Up to 4” Glass fiber 2" Yes Note 1

> 6" Glass fiber 2" Yes Note 1

NOTE 1: Provide an aluminum field applied jacket 0.040 inch thick with 1-1/4 by 1/4 inch

corrugations over insulation.




TRO No. 2017021


230719 - 18

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

230900 - 1

SECTION 230900


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. All DIVISION 23, HVAC Systems and Equipment.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface

equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers oper-

ating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to con-

trol mechanical systems. The control system shall reside on its own Ethernet infrastructure and

not share the hospital network.

B. Control system include the following:

1. The control system shall be web based with interface to Wellstar Cobb Hospital main

campus control system. The system shall provide control interface, monitoring, alarms,

and all other control aspects of the existing control system. The system shall communi-

cate over a dedicated control system Ethernet backbone. System shall be capable of

communicating to off site, and local DDC panels through an Ethernet network.

2. Provide a system designed with 2 levels of alarm priority. Each alarm type shall be re-

viewed with the Owner to determine the proper alarm priority.

a. Each priority level shall initiate a distinct communications protocol as defined by

the Owner.

3. Provide services necessary to assist in the BIM (Building Information Model) coordina-

tion of the project. Sensors, valves, dampers, meters, gages, control panels, operator sta-

tions, etc shall be shown in the fabrication model and it shall be the responsibility of the

Instrumentation and Control Contractor to input this information into the BIM coordina-

tion model.

4. Instrumentation and Controls Contractor shall provide all Record Drawing documenta-

tion integrated into the final BIM model. Record Drawing information shall include loca-

tion and unique identification of all control system components with live links embedded

into the BIM linked to PDF versions of the Operations and Maintenance Manuals for the

associated control component.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 2

5. An Adaptive Chilled Water control system shall be provided with a control methodology

that allows the chiller plant to react to changes made to chiller plant components and re-

adjusts the equipment status based on minimizing total power consumed by the chiller

plant.

6. The controls system shall collect all metering data from all metering devices provided

under Div 23 section Meters and Gauges. The data shall be used in an energy dashboard

interface at the control workstations that will allow the user to see metered data as a trend

logged graph.

a. Building Management System shall collect the electrical monitoring and metering

data from the electrical system power monitoring system and integrate this

information into the energy dashboard.

b. Building Management System shall collect the information from the water meters

throughout the campus. This information shall be integrated into the energy

dashboard.

7. Provide a secure remote means of connection to access all building controls systems on

the campus via the internet for the Project Engineer. The dedicated internet connection

shall be provided by the HVAC instrumentation and controls contractor. Access shall be

provided for two TRO engineering staff members as soon as the head end workstations

are in place and operational on the site. The access shall be password protected to allow

the project engineers to only perform monitoring and trend logging capabilities for all

control functions and trendable data points. Access to the system for the project engineer

shall remain in place throughout the entire construction process and shall last for a period

of one year beyond date of substantial completion.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing

interoperable control devices and networks.

D. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

E. PC: Personal computer.

F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 3

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data

within 10 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data

within 8 seconds.

3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of

a binary object and device reaction.

4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or

workstation within six seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple

workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,

but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan

and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured

variables within tolerances as follows:

a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).

b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.

c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.

d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F (0.5 deg C).

e. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1.0 deg C).

f. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F (1.5 deg C).

g. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F (0.15 deg C).

h. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.

1.5 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL

A. Technical proposals shall be prepared in accordance with these specifications. Four (4) copies

of the proposal shall be submitted with the bid. The technical proposal shall include the follow-

ing minimal data and information.

1. Information on organizational capability to handle this project (management, personnel,

manufacturing, single source responsibility, etc.)

2. Information on training program to demonstrate specification compliance.

3. System Configuration as Proposed:

a. Describe system architecture including a schematic layout with location and type

(model number) of all control panels.

b. Describe system operation, hardware and software functions, description of soft-

ware editors, and control techniques.

c. Modularity.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 4

d. Provisions against obsolescence due to technological advancement. Provide list of

project references.

e. Provide hardware and software data sheets on interfaces with third party systems

(e.g. chiller).

4. Technical data to support the information on the hardware configuration.

5. Detailed description of all operating, command, application and energy management

software provided for this project.

6. A signed certificate stating the Contractor "has read the performance and functional re-

quirements, understands them, and the technical proposal complies with all parts of the

specification."

7. Line by line specification concordance statement.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate

dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for

materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity,

manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation

equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors,

actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator

interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,

manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence

of operation including schematic diagram.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.

2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices.

3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling.

5. Written description of sequence of operation.

6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.

7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.

8. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.

b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 5

c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit

locations.

9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data

(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

10. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and

control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including

bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.

d. Points list.

C. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover.

D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files.

3. Device address list.

4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.

E. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions

or monitoring and control revisions.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer-].

G. Field quality-control test reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and

compressed-air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and

devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.

4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances.

5. Calibration records and list of set points.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 6


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative

who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for

intended use.

C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to

be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment

manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans

and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator

workstation.

C. Coordinate equipment with DIVISION 26, SECTION 260913 - ELECTRICAL POWER

MONITORING AND CONTROL to achieve compatibility of communication interfaces.

D. Coordinate equipment with DIVISION 26, SECTION 261416 - PANELBOARDS to achieve

compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

E. Coordinate equipment with DIVISION 26, SECTION 262419 - MOTOR-CONTROL

CENTERS to achieve compatibility with motor starters and annunciation devices.

F. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in DIVISION 03, SECTION 033000 -

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged

with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 7

1. Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each unique

valve motor and controller.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to

product selection:


manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control.

2. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group.

3. Siemens Building Technologies.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface

equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers

operating in multi-user, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed

to control mechanical systems.

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: (3) Notebook-style, microcomputer terminals capable of accessing

system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration as follows:

1. System: With one integrated USB 2.0 port, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet),

integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring;

2. Processor: Intel;

3. Random-Access Memory: Random-Access Memory: 4 GB SDRAM;

4. Graphics: Super video graphic adapter (SVGA), minimum 1280 x 1024 pixels, 500.0-

MB video memory;

5. Monitor: 17 inches (430 mm) LCD color;

6. Keyboard: Integral to notebook;

7. Hard-Disk Drive: 500 GB;

8. DVD/CD-ROM writable Drive: 32x; and

9. Pointing Device: Touch pad or other internal device.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 8

B. Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion

C. LANs: Capacity for a minimum of 10 workstations connected to multiuser, multitasking envi-

ronment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units.

1. Media: Ethernet, peer-to-peer CMA/CD, operating at 10 MBps or greater.

D. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-

access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and

backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from

other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to

operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions


a. Global communications.

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing.

e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time

scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with

differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with

fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy

switchover.

c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled-

water reset, and equipment sequencing.

d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and

messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time

totalization; and security access.

e. Remote communications.

f. Maintenance management.

g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).

4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or

diagnostic terminal unit.

5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and

communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

6. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate

using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 9

E. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable,

nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or

upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions


a. Global communications.

b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.

c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or

diagnostic terminal unit.

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and

communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

5. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate

using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.

F. Graphic Interface Controller: The graphic interface controller shall be a fully user programma-

ble Windows PC and contain a 17” touchscreen LCD display. . The screen shall be capable of

displaying high resolution video images, database values, and predefined control animations

such as buttons, keypads, and gauges to enable operators to easily view and modify system in-

formation. Refer to the Drawings for graphic interface requirements.

1. The display shall be capable of generating color images of floor plans, equipment, sche-

matics, control animations and database values. The screen shall be capable issue an au-

dible sound upon touching the screen.

2. The graphic interface shall contain a real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per day.

The real time clock shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month,

year, and day of the week. Each controller shall be capable of receiving a signal over the

network to synchronize all of the clocks at the same time.

3. The graphic interface shall have a built in power supply..

4. The graphic interface shall be designed for flush mounting on a wall.

G. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect

points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.

2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.

3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),

or resistance signals.

4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and

status lights.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 10

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current

(4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually

adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,

floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

H. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection;

limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output

current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.

2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes.

3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent

overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

I. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for

workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.

2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.

3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.

4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating

system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the

application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication,

and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable;

memory with bios; and 72 hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share

real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform

scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system

and report failures.

3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write

(execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network

using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for

connection to diagnostic terminal unit.

4. LonWorks Compliance: Communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer

protocol using LonTalk protocol.

5. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 50 deg C).



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 11

2.5 ALARM PANELS

A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch- (1.5-

mm-) thick, furniture-quality steel or extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged

doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish. Provide common

keying for all panels.

B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted

on hinged cover.

1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds.

2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady.

3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady.

4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished.

5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company.

2.6 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as

required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:

1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.36 deg F (0.2 deg C) at calibration point.

2. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.

3. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion

length of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.

b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.

c. Thermometer: Concealed.

d. Color: Manufacturers Standard White..

e. Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal.

5. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

6. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

C. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.

1. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output.

2. Room Sensor Range: 0 to 80 percent relative humidity.

3. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 12

b. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.

c. Thermometer: Concealed.

d. Color: Manufacturers Standard White.

e. Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal.

4. Outside-Air Sensor: 0 to 80 percent relative humidity range with mounting enclosure,

suitable for operation at outdoor temperatures of 0 to 120 deg. F relative humidity.

D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected

input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.

b. Output: 4 to 20 mA.

c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg (0 to 62 Pa).

d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg (0 to 1240 Pa).

2. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service;

0 - 250-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

3. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction,

suitable for service; 0 - 250-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig; linear output 4

to 20 mA.

4. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with

suitable scale range and differential.

5. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for

system; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

E. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.

2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed.

3. Thermometer: Concealed.

4. Color: Manufacturers Standard White.

5. Orientation: Vertical or horizontal.

F. Room sensor accessories include the following:

1. Insulating Bases: For sensors located on exterior walls.

2. Guards: Mounted on separate insulated base.

3. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.

2.7 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Current Switch.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 13

B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Current Switch.

C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-

core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated

motor current.

D. Voltage Transmitter (100- to 600-V ac): Comply with ISA 50.00.01, single-loop, self-powered

transmitter, adjustable, with suitable range and 1 percent full-scale accuracy.

E. Power Monitor: 3-phase type with disconnect/shorting switch assembly, listed voltage and

current transformers, with pulse kilowatt hour output and 4- to 20-mA kW output, with

maximum 2 percent error at 1.0 power factor and 2.5 percent error at 0.5 power factor.

F. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match

current and system output requirements.

G. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to

10-V dc, feedback signal.

H. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating,

stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in

NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.

2.8 GAS DETECTION EQUIPMENT

A. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Single or multichannel, dual-level detectors using solid-state

plug-in sensors with a 3-year minimum life; suitable over a temperature range of -20 to 110

deg F; with 2 factory-calibrated alarm levels at 35 to 200 ppm.

B. Carbon Dioxide Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state infrared sensors;

suitable over a temperature range of -20 to 110 deg F and calibrated for 0 to 2 percent, with

continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output;, for wall mounting.

C. Oxygen Sensor and Transmitter: Single detectors using solid-state zircon cell sensing; suitable

over a temperature range of minus 32 to plus 1100 deg F (0 to 593 deg C) and calibrated for 0 to

5 percent, with continuous or averaged reading, 4- to 20-mA output; for wall mounting. Oxygen

sensors used in MRI installations must be rated for duty specifically for MRI installations.

D. Occupancy Sensor: Dual sensing infrared and ultrasonic, with time delay, daylight sensor

lockout, sensitivity control, and 180-degree field of view with vertical sensing adjustment; for

flush mounting.

2.9 MANUFACTURERS



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 14


lowing:

1. Refrigerant Monitoring Equipment:

a. Davis Instruments Manufacturing Co., Inc.

b. Foxboro Company (The).

c. General Analysis Corp.

d. Genesis International Inc.

e. Thermal Gas Systems, Inc.; Haloguard Monitors.

2.10 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION OF REFRIGERANT MONITORING SYSTEM

A. On leak detection by refrigerant sensor(s), the system shall perform the following:

1. Activate machinery room ventilation.

2. Activate audio and visual alarm inside and outside machinery room.

3. Notify Building Automation System of alarm condition.

2.11 REFRIGERANT MONITOR

A. Description: CMOS or IR sensor shall continuously measure and display the specific gas con-

centration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming, and shutting down equipment, and au-

tomatically activating ventilation system.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: HFC-134a or other refrigerant used by provided chillers.

2. Refrigerant Concentration: 0 to 1000 ppm.

3. Accuracy: 100 to 1000 ppm; plus or minus 10 percent of reading.

4. Linearity: 100 to 1000 ppm; plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.

5. Sensitivity: 1 ppm.

6. Resolution: 1 ppm.

7. Operating Temperature: 41 to 104 deg F (5 to 40 deg C).

8. Response Time: 90 percent of a step change in 4 minutes.

9. Relatively Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating temperature

range.

C. Operating Requirements:

1. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac; 60 Hz, 30 W.

2. Alarm Relays: 4 relays at 5- to 8-A resistive load.

3. Alarm Set Points: Displayed on front of meter.

4. Audible Output: Sonic alert at 75 to 80 dB at 60 inches (1525 mm).

5. Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc or 4- to 20-mA current sourcing.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 15

6. Serial Output Type: RS 232.

D. Sensor Configuration: Photoabsorptive IR sensor.

1. Expandable to four channels.

E. Display: 10-character, alphanumeric, vacuum-fluorescent indicating lights for each alarm set

point; standard alarm; acknowledge switch and test switch mounted on front panel; and alarm

status LEDs and service fault LEDs.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, type as required for ambient condition.

F. Alarm Output: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds.

1. Remote unit for mounting outside machinery room and having light beacon with double

lights.

2. Field-adjustable alarm set points.

G. Calibration: Factory calibrated.

2.12 THERMOSTATS

A. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Line-voltage thermostat with push-button or lever-

operated fan switch.

1. Label switches "FAN HIGH-LOW-OFF".

2. Mount on single electric switch box.

B. Electric, solid-state, microcomputer-based room thermostat with remote sensor.

1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.

2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.

3. Set up for four separate temperatures per day.

4. Instant override of set point for continuous or timed period from 1 hour to 31 days.

5. Short-cycle protection.

6. Programming based on every day of week.

7. Selection features include degree F or degree C display, 12- or 24-hour clock, keyboard

disable, remote sensor, and fan on-auto.

8. Battery replacement without program loss.

9. Thermostat display features include the following:

a. Time of day.

b. Actual room temperature.

c. Programmed temperature.

d. Programmed time.

e. Duration of timed override.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 16

f. Day of week.

g. System mode indications include "heating," "off," "fan auto," and "fan on."

C. Low-Voltage, On-Off Thermostats: NEMA DC 3, 24-V, bimetal-operated, mercury-switch

type, with adjustable or fixed anticipation heater, concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 85 deg F

(13 to 30 deg C) set-point range, and 2 deg F (1 deg C) maximum differential.

D. Electric, Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed

across any 12 inches (300 mm) of bulb length is equal to or below set point.

1. Bulb Length: Minimum 20 feet (6 m).

2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 20 sq. ft. (2 sq. m) of coil surface.

2.13 ACTUATORS

A. Electric Motors: Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating

action or two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR

REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT.

2. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed

and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in

housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary

switches, or feedback potentiometer.

3. Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running

torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf (33.9 N x m).

4. Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Size for running and

breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).

5. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for

running torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m) and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf

(33.9 N x m).

6. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft. (2.3 sq. m): Size for running

and breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf (16.9 N x m).

B. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at

rated torque.

1. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential

pressure.

2. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. (86.8 kg-cm/sq. m) of

damper.

b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. (62 kg-cm/sq. m) of

damper.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 17

c. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft (49.6 kg-cm/sq. m) of

damper.

d. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. (37.2 kg-cm/sq. m)

of damper.

e. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg (500 to 750 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities

of 1000 to 2500 fpm (5 to 13 m/s): Increase running torque by 1.5.

f. Dampers with 3- to 4-Inch wg (750 to 1000 Pa) of Pressure Drop or Face

Velocities of 2500 to 3000 fpm (13 to 15 m/s): Increase running torque by 2.0.

3. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.

4. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.

5. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators.

6. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 or 120 -V ac.

7. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.

8. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal.

9. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F.

10. Temperature Rating (Smoke Dampers): Minus 22 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 30 to plus

121 deg C).

11. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

12. Standard spring ranges are 2 to 5 psig (14 to 35 kPa), 3 to 10 psig (21 to 69 kPa), and 8 to

11 psig (55 to 76 kPa).

2.14 CONTROL VALVES

A. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on

maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Hydronic system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Class 125 or 250, as required, bronze body, bronze trim,

rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity

repackable under pressure.

2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type

disc, flanged ends, and renewable seat and disc.

3. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel or brass seats.

a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on

top and bottom.

b. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding

surfaces for plugs on top and bottom.

4. Sizing: 3-psig (21-kPa) to 5-psig (35-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or

the following:



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 18

a. Two Position: Line size.

b. Two-Way Modulating: Either the value specified above or twice the load pressure

drop, whichever is more.

c. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value

specified above.

5. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-

way valves shall have linear characteristics.

6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide

minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-

way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total

system (pump) head.

C. Pressure Independent Hydronic system globe valves shall be provided as follows:

1. Valve shall be on of the following manufactured products:

a. Danfoss Inc, Model AB-QM

b. Belimo Inc. ; Model PICCV (Sizes 2” and under), Model ePIV.

2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Class 125 or 250, as required, bronze body, bronze trim,

and screwed ends.

3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Class 125 iron body, bronze trim.

4. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics and

provide pressure independent balancing characteristics over an inlet pressure range of 5 –

50 psig..

5. Actuator: Electronic 24 V actuator provided by valve manufacturer. Actuator to be

matched to valve to provide a linear flow response to signal.

6. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide

minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head.

D. Butterfly Valves: 200-psig (1380-kPa) maximum pressure differential, ASTM A 126 cast-iron

or ASTM A 536 ductile-iron body and bonnet, extended neck, stainless-steel stem, field-

replaceable EPDM or Buna N sleeve and stem seals.

1. Body Style: Lug.

2. Disc Type: Aluminum bronze.

3. Sizing: 1-psig (7-kPa) maximum pressure drop at design flow rate.

2.15 DAMPERS

A. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel or opposed-blade design as indicated on the Drawings;

0.1084-inch (2.8-mm) minimum, galvanized-steel frames with holes for duct mounting; damper



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 19

blades shall not be less than 0.0635-inch (1.6-mm) galvanized steel with maximum blade width

of 8 inches (203 mm).

1. Blades shall be secured to 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-

plated hardware, with nylon blade bearings, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel

and brass, ends sealed against spring-stainless-steel blade bearings, and thrust bearings at

each end of every blade.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (minus 40 to plus 93

deg C).

3. For standard applications, include optional closed-cell neoprene edging.

4. For low-leakage applications, use parallel- or opposed-blade design with inflatable seal

blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals, rated for leakage at less than 10 cfm per sq. ft.

(51 L/s per sq. m) of damper area, at differential pressure of 4 inches wg (995 Pa) when

damper is being held by torque of 50 in. x lbf (5.6 N x m); when tested according to

AMCA 500D.

5. Dampers installed in intake or exhaust ducts shall be TAMCO Series 9000-Thermally In-

sulated Damper.

2.16 CONTROL CABLE

A. Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring are specified in DIVISION 27, SECTION

271500 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2 Verify that conditioned UPS power supply is available to Unitary Controllers and operator

workstations.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of

programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings

and room details before installation. Install devices or 60 inches (1530 mm) above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 20

D. Install automatic dampers according to DIVISION 23, SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT

ACCESSORIES.

E. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor

temperatures.

F. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to DIVISION 23,

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

G. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to DIVISION 23,

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING.

H. Install duct volume-control dampers according to DIVISION 23, SECTION 233113 - METAL

DUCT specifying air ducts.

I. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to DIVISION 27, SECTION

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING.

3.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to DIVISION 26, SECTION 260533 -

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

B. Install building wire and cable according to DIVISION 26, SECTION 260519 - LOW-

VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.

C. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.

Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

D. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is

in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 21

4. Pressure test high-pressure control air piping at 150 psig (1034 kPa) and low-pressure

control air piping at 30 psig (207 kPa) for 2 hours, with maximum 1-psig (7-kPa) loss.

5. Test calibration of: pneumatic and electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors

and stimulating operation with compatible signal generator.

6. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required.

7. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions.

8. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.

9. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks.

2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.

3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations.

4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support.

5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.

6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet

side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.

7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-

contained pressure regulators.

8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.

9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.

10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided.

11. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if

applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and

approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.

d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments.

2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 22

3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument

being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.

b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.

c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire.

d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.

e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point

calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.

6. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.

b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential

set at minimum.

7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span

using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the

manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and

closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's

recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.

11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,

provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to

three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.



TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 23

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to DIVISION 01,

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.




TRO No. 2017021


230900 - 24

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM

283500 - 1

SECTION 283500


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant monitors, notification appliances, and SCBA.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMOS: Complementary metal-oxide semiconductor.

B. LCD: Liquid-crystal display.

C. LED: Light-emitting diode.

D. MOS: Metal-oxide semiconductor.

E. NDIR: Non-dispersive infrared.

F. PIR: Photoacoustic infrared.

G. SCBA: Self-contained breathing apparatus.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. For each type of refrigerant monitor, include refrigerant sensing range in ppm,

temperature and humidity range, alarm outputs, display range, furnished specialties,

installation requirements, and electric power requirement.

2. For SCBA, include mounting details, service requirements, and compliance with

authorized Federal agency.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Air-Sampling Tubing: Size, routing, and termination including elevation above finished

floor.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.



TRO No. 2017021


283500 - 2

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Include machinery-room layout showing location of monitoring

devices and air-sampling tubing with filter/inlet locations in relation to refrigerant equipment.

B. Product Certificates: For monitoring devices and SCBA, signed by product manufacturer.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant monitoring equipment and SCBA to include

in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS



1. One calibration kit including clean air calibration gas bottle for zero calibration and

specific refrigerant calibration gas for span calibration, minimum 58-L capacity, pressure

regulator, and tubing.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate refrigerant detection and alarm system with refrigerant contained in refrigeration

equipment for compatibility.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NDIR REFRIGERANT MONITOR


following:

1. Bacharach, Inc.

2. Genesis International Inc.

B. Description: Sensor shall be factory tested, calibrated, and certified to continuously measure

and display the specific gas concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming, and

automatically activating ventilation system.

C. ASHRAE: Monitoring system shall comply with ASHRAE 15.

D. Performance:

1. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: R-123 or R-134a.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456803753&mf=04&src=wd




TRO No. 2017021


283500 - 3

2. Range: 0 to 1000 ppm.

3. Sensitivity:

a. Minimum Detectability: 10 ppm.

b. Accuracy: 0 to 100 ppm; plus or minus 10 ppm. 100 to 1000 ppm; plus or minus

10 percent of reading.

c. Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.

d. Response: Maximum 10 seconds per sample.

e. Detection Level Set Points:


5. Relative Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating temperature

range. Compensate sensor for relative humidity.

E. Input/Output Features:

1. Maximum Power Input: as required by the monitor manufacturer

2. Number of Air-Sampling Points: 16

3. Air-Sampling Point Inlet Filter: 0.10-micron filter element for each sampling point.

4. Air-Sampling Point Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k

ohms matched to sensor output.

5. Alarm Relays: Minimum 4 relays at a minimum of 5-A resistive load each.

6. Alarm Set Points: Displayed on front of meter and adjustable through keypad on front of

meter.

7. Alarm Acknowledge Switch: Mount in the front panel of the monitor to stop audible and

visual notification appliances, but alarm LED remains illuminated.

8. Alarm Manual Reset: Momentary-contact push button in the front panel of the monitor

stops audible and visual notification appliances, extinguishes alarm LED, and returns

monitor to detection mode at current detection levels.

9. Display: Alphanumeric LCD, LED indicating lights for each detection level;

acknowledge switch and test switch mounted on front panel; alarm status LEDs and

service fault LEDs.

10. Audible Output: Minimum 75 dB at 10 feet (3 m).

11. Visible Output: Strobe light.

12. Sensor Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k ohms.

13. Serial Output: RS-232 or RS-485 compatible with HVAC controls.

14. Enclosure: NEMA 250, , with locking quarter-turn latch and key.

2.2 PIR REFRIGERANT MONITOR


following:

1. Chillgard Refrigerant Monitors; MSA; Instrument Division.

2. Haloguard Monitors; Thermal Gas Systems, Inc.





TRO No. 2017021


283500 - 4

B. Description: Sensor shall be factory tested, calibrated, and certified to continuously measure

and display the specific gas concentration and shall be capable of indicating, alarming,and

automatically activating ventilation system.

C. ASHRAE: Monitoring system shall comply with ASHRAE 15.

D. Performance:

1. Refrigerant to Be Monitored: R-123 or R-134a.

2. Range: 0 to 1000 ppm.

3. Sensitivity:

a. Minimum Detectability: 10 ppm.

b. Accuracy: 0 to 50 ppm; plus or minus 1 ppm. 51 to 1000 ppm; plus or minus 10

percent of reading.

c. Repeatability: Plus or minus 1 percent of full scale.

d. Response: Maximum 10 seconds per sample.

e. Detection Level Set Points:


5. Relative Humidity: 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing over the operating temperature

range. Compensate sensor for relative humidity.

E. Input/Output Features:

1. Maximum Power Input: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, 75 W.

2. Number of Air-Sampling Points: 16.

3. Air-Sampling Point Inlet Filter: 0.10-micron filter element for each sampling point.

4. Air-Sampling Point Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k

ohms matched to sensor output.

5. Alarm Relays: Minimum 4 relays at a minimum of 5-A resistive load each.

6. Alarm Set Points: Displayed and adjustable through keypad on front of meter.

7. Alarm Silence Switch: Mount in the front panel of the monitor to stop audible and visual

notification appliances, but alarm LED remains illuminated.

8. Alarm Manual Reset: Momentary-contact push button in the front panel of the monitor

stops audible and visual notification appliances, extinguishes alarm LED, and returns

monitor to detection mode at current detection levels.

9. Display: Alphanumeric LCD, LED indicating lights for each detection level;

acknowledge switch and test switch mounted on front panel; alarm status LEDs and

service fault/trouble LEDs.

10. Audible Output: Minimum 75 dB at 10 feet (3 m).

11. Visible Output: Strobe light.

12. Sensor Analog Output: 0- to 10-V dc into 2k ohms, or 4- to 20-mA into 1k ohms.

13. Serial Output: RS-232 or RS-485 compatible with HVAC controls.

14. Enclosure: NEMA 250, with locking quarter-turn latch and key.



TRO No. 2017021


283500 - 5

2.3 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. Horns: Comply with UL 464; electric-vibrating-polarized type, listed by a qualified testing

agency with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Horns shall

produce a sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn.

B. Visible Alarm Devices: Comply with UL 1971; three color xenon strobe lights, with clear or

nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The words

"REFRIGERANT DETECTION" printed in minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on the

lens. Rated light output is 75 candela.

2.4 AIR-SAMPLING TUBING

A. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B).

2.5 SCBA


following:

1. MSA; Safety Products Division.

2. Scott Health & Safety; a division of Tyco Safety Products.

3. Survivair

B. Description: Open-circuit, pressure-demand, compressed-air SCBA; includes completely

assembled, portable, self-contained devices designed for application in hazardous breathing

environment. Tested and certified by the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

and the Mine Safety and Health Administration according to 42 CFR 84, Subpart H.

C. Face Piece: [one-size-fits-all with double-sealing edge, stainless-steel speaking diaphragm and

lens retainer, five adjustable straps to hold face piece to head (two straps on each side and one

on top), exhalation valve in mask, close-fitting nose piece to ensure no CO2 buildup, and

perspiration drain to avoid skin irritation and prevent lens fogging.

D. Backplate: Ergonomically designed of glass fiber, aluminum, or thermoset plastic.

E. Harness and Carrier Assembly: Large triangular back pad, with backplate and adjustable waist

and shoulders straps. Modular design, detachable components, easy to clean and maintain.

Shoulder straps are padded with flame-resistant material, reinforced with stainless-steel cable,

and attached with T-nuts, washers, and screws.

F. Air Cylinder, Regulator, and Pressure Gages: 30-minute, low-pressure 2216-psig (15.3-MPa),

aluminum cylinders fitted with quick-fill assembly for refilling and air transfer. Two-stage

regulator, and gage with end of service time whistle signal.

G. Wall-Mounted Case: Watertight, high visibility orange or yellow, corrosion-resistant, tough,

lockable plastic case.






TRO No. 2017021


283500 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASHRAE 15.

B. Install air-sampling inlets, or diffusion type monitors in pits, tunnels, or trenches in machinery

room that are accessible to personnel.

C. Floor mount diffusion-type monitor, sensor/transmitters, or air-sampling inlets on slotted

channel frame 12 to 18 inches (300 to 450 mm) above the floor in a location near the refrigerant

source or between the refrigerant source and the ventilation duct inlet.

D. Wall mount air-sampling multiple-point monitors with top of unit 60 inches (1525 mm) above

finished floor.

E. Run air-sampling tubing from monitor to air-sampling point, in size as required by monitor

manufacturer. Install tubing with maximum unsupported length of 36 inches (915 mm), for

tubing exposed to view. Terminate air-sampling tubing at sampling point with filter

recommended by monitor manufacturer.

F. Install air-sampling tubing with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration

of tubing and movement of equipment.

G. Purge air-sampling tubing with dry, oil-free compressed air before connecting to monitor.

H. Number-code or color-code air-sampling tubing for future identification and service of air-

sampling multiple-point monitors.

I. Extend air-sampling tubing from exhaust part of multiple-point monitors to outside.

J. Extend air-sampling tubing from outdoors to outdoor inlet connection of NDIR monitors.

Terminate air-sampling tubing at outdoor inlet location with filter recommended by monitor

manufacturer.

K. Place warning signs inside and outside each door to the refrigeration equipment room. Sample

wording: "AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM SOUNDING INDICATES REFRIGERANT

DETECTION - ENTRY REQUIRES SCBA."

L. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at each entry door to refrigeration equipment room,

and position not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install horns on flush-mounted

back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

M. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm horn at each entry door to

refrigeration equipment room, and position at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.

N. Mount SCBA on wall outside each interior door to refrigeration equipment room.



TRO No. 2017021


283500 - 7


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare

test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and electrical connections

for compliance with requirements.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

a. Test procedures used.

b. Test results that comply with requirements.

c. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.

C. Repair or replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain refrigerant detection devices and SCBA equipment. Refer to

requirements in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

B. SCBA Training: Provide an instructional video that details operating procedures of equipment.




TRO No. 2017021


283500 - 8

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 1

SECTION 232113

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract in DIVISION 01 Specification Sections,

apply to this Section.


1. SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT.

2. SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

3. SECTION 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT.

4. SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.

5. SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION.

6. SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC.

7. SECTION 232500 - HVAC WATER TREATMENT.



10. DIVISION 7 SECTION 078413 "PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

11. DIVISION 7 SECTION 079200 "JOINT SEALANTS"

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and

specialties for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping.

2. Condenser-water piping.

3. Makeup-water piping.

4. Air-vent piping.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following

minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: 160 psig (1103 kPa)> at 200 deg F (93 deg C) .

2. Condenser-Water Piping: 160 psig (1103 kPa)> at 150 deg F (66 deg C).



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 2

3. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig (552 kPa) at 150 deg F (66 deg C).

4. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F (93 deg C).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe materials.

2. Unions and flanges, including gaskets, nuts, and bolts.

3. Welding fittings.

4. Grooved-joint couplings and fittings.

5. Sleeves and packings.

6. Pressure-seal fittings.

7. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for

calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

8. Air control devices.

9. Chemical treatment.

10. Hydronic Specialties: Submit schedule listing type, make and model number, size and

service for all hydronic specialties.

B. Shop Drawings: In compliance with specification section 231000, the piping layout,

fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion

joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of

anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Field quality-control test reports. Written reports of tests specified in Part 3 of this Section.

Include the following:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Failed test results and corrective action taken to achieve requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-

duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications:



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 3

1. Installers of Pressure-Sealed Joints: Installers shall be certified by the pressure-seal joint

manufacturer as having been trained and qualified to join piping with pressure-seal pipe

couplings and fittings.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code: Section IX.

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."

2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

D. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,

products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME

label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

E. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved end piping systems,

all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by one manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be

supplied by the same manufacturer as the grooved components.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for

preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Differential Pressure Meter: For each type of balancing valve and automatic flow control

valve, include flowmeter, probes, hoses, flow charts, and carrying case.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of hydronic piping and suspension system components with

other construction, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system compo-

nents, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate pipe sleeve installations for foundation wall penetrations.

C. Coordinate piping installation with roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

Roof specialties are specified in DIVISION 7 SECTIONS.

D. Coordinate pipe fitting pressure classes with products specified in related Sections.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 4

E. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into base. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in DIVISION 3 SECTIONS.

F. Coordinate installation of pipe sleeves for penetrations through exterior walls and floor

assemblies. Coordinate with requirements for firestopping specified in DIVISION 7

SECTION 078413" PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING" for fire and smoke wall and floor

assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B.

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A).

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.


following:

a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products.

D. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:


following:

a. Stadler-Viega.

2. Housing: Copper.

3. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM.

4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools.

5. Minimum 200-psig (1379-kPa) working-pressure rating at 250 deg F (121 deg C).

E. Copper, Mechanically Formed Tee Option: For forming T-branch on copper water tube.


following:

a. T-DRILL Industries Inc.

F. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 5

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as

indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping

Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3

"Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised

ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,

nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1.

2. End Connections: Butt welding.

3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:


following:

a. Victaulic Company of America.

b. Grinnell

c. Anvil International, Inc.

d. Central Sprinkler Company; a division of Tyco Fire & Building Products.

e. National Fittings, Inc.

f. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products

2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E,

or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or

shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin,

locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

3. Couplings: Ductile-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-

responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved

pipe and fittings.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 6

a. Rigid Type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads to

provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ASME B31.1

and B31.9. Only designs that require metal-to-metal pad contact permitted.

Designs that permit spaces or gaps at bolt pads not permitted.

b. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief

are required.

c. Flange Adapters: Ductile iron housing, flat face, for use with grooved end pipe

and fittings, for mating directly with ANSI Class 125, 150, and 300 flanges.

I. Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings:


following:

a. Victaulic Company of America.

2. Housing: Stainless Steel.

3. O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM.

4. Tools: Manufacturer's special tool.

5. Minimum 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 230 deg F (110 deg C).

J. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in

which they are installed.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents for chilled water, heating hot water, condenser water, makeup water, low pressure

condensate, pumped condensate, and fuel oil piping.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness un-

less thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system

contents for blow-down piping.

1. ASME B16.20, Spiral Wound Metallic,1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless

thickness or specific material is indicated. The Spiral wound gaskets material shall be

316L stainless steel with the maximum system rating of temperature 1,400 F and pressure

rating of 500 psig. The metallic gasket shall have a outer centering ring and an inner ring.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 7

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to

ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper

with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials

appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-

joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions:


following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Hart Industries International, Inc.

d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.

2. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at

180 deg F (82 deg C).

D. Dielectric Flanges:


following:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.

b. Central Plastics Company.

c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa)

minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits:



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 8


following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. Calpico, Inc.

c. Central Plastics Company.

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type

neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and

steel backing washers.

3. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig (1035- or

2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

F. Dielectric Couplings:


following:

a. Calpico, Inc.

b. Lochinvar Corporation.

2. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends;

and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).

G. Dielectric Nipples:


following:

a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.

c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.

2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain,

threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225

deg F (107 deg C).

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in

DIVISION 23, SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 9

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements

specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

FOR HVAC.

C. Combination Balancing & Shutoff Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:


following:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Victaulic/Tour & Andersson

2. Body: Bronze, ball or or Ametal Copper Alloy Y-Pattern.

3. Seat: PTFE or Ametal

4. End Connections: Threaded or socket.

5. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

6. Handle Style: Digital Handwheel, with memory stop to retain set position.

7. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).

8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F (121 deg C).

D. Combination Balancing & Shutoff Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:


following:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

b. Victaulic/Tour & Andersson

2. Body: Ductile-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or

venturi.

3. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.

4. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.

5. Seat: PTFE.

6. End Connections: Flanged.

7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.

8. Handle Style: Digital Handwheel, with memory stop to retain set position.

9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig (860 kPa).


E. Differential Pressure Controllers


following:

a. Victaulic/Tour & Andersson

b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 10

2. Body: Ametal copper alloy or ductile iron

3. Seat: EPDM

4. Ends: Threaded or flanged

5. Membrane: HNBR or EPDM

6. Spring: Stainless Steel

7. Series 793 for ½” through 2” suitable for -29F to 250F differential pressure control,

measuring points, shutoff and drainage

8. Series 794 for 2-1/2” through 4” suitable for -29F to 175F differential pressure control,

measuring points and shutoff.

F. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:


following:

a. Amtrol, Inc.


c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or brass.


4. Seat: Brass.


6. Diaphragm: EPT.

7. Low inlet-pressure check valve.

8. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.

9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,

with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

G. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:


following:

a. Amtrol, Inc.


c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

d. Conbraco Industries, Inc.

e. Spence Engineering Company, Inc.

f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Body: Bronze or brass.


4. Seat: Brass.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 11


6. Diaphragm: EPT.

7. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.

8. Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.

9. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.

10. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating

pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.

H. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Flow Design Inc.

b. Griswold Controls.

2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal.

3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.

4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.

5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.

6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed.

7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure

fluctuations.

8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig (1207 kPa).


2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES


following:

1. Amtrol, Inc.

2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.

3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.

4. Taco.

B. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8 (DN 6).

6. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 12


C. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron.

2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous.

3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.

4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).

5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4 (DN 8).



D. Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 375 deg F (191

deg C) maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and

taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested with taps fabricated and

labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and

stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. (379-L) unit only; sized for compression-tank

diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 250 deg F

(121 deg C) maximum operating temperature.

3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig (860-kPa) working

pressure and 240 deg F (116 deg C) maximum operating temperature; constructed to

admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system.

4. Gage Glass: Full height with dual manual shutoff valves, 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) diameter

gage glass, and slotted-metal glass guard.

E. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure and 375 deg F (191

deg C) maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports

installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,

Division 1.

2. Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain

required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

F. Tangential-Type Air Separators:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig (860-kPa) minimum

working pressure and 375 deg F (191 deg C) maximum operating temperature.

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into

expansion tank.

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller;

flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 13

5. Size: Match system flow capacity.

G. Air Purgers:

1. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from

solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.

2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig (1035 kPa).


2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig (860-kPa) working pressure; 5-

gal. (19-L) capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent

accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-

1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area.


B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective

jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.

3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch (20-mm) misalignment.



C. Grooved-End Strainers for Steel Piping:

1. Y-Pattern Strainers:

a. Body: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron with coupling/cap and blowdown port bottom

drain connection.

b. End Connection: Grooved ends for NPS 2 Through NPS 12.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 14

c. Strainer Screen: 0.062”, 0.125” or 0.156” Type 304 stainless steel perforated

removable basket.

d. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).

2. T-Pattern Strainers:

a. Body: ASTM A 536 ductile iron with removable access coupling/cap, or ASTM A

53 carbon steel with T-bolt hinged closure/cap for strainer maintenance.

b. End Connection: Standard grooved ends for NPS 2 Through NPS 12

c. Strainer Screen: [12] [6] [4] mesh, Type 304 stainless steel removable basket.

d. CWP Rating: Up to 750 psi.

D. Spherical, Rubber, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Fiber-reinforced rubber body.

2. End Connections: Steel flanges drilled to align with Classes 150 and 300 steel flanges.

3. Performance: Capable of misalignment.



E. Expansion fittings are specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230516 - EXPANSION

FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Type L (B), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or

pressure-seal joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and

flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.


pressure-seal joints are allowed for pipe sizes up to 4”.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be the following:





TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 15

D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, shall be the following:





3. Schedule 40, steel pipe, grooved mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved

mechanical joints.

E. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be any of the

following:



2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; fittings; and threaded joints.

F. Condenser-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, shall be any of the

following:





3. Schedule 40, steel pipe, grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.re.

G. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L (B), drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.

H. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type L (B),, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings,

and soldered joints.

I. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the

service in which blowdown drain is installed.

J. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic

piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K (A), annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

K. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining

methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 16

plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's

written instructions.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection

to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.

C. Install calibrated balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow

direction.

E. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping

systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and

calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping

as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right

angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated

otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 17

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing

of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 (DN 20) ball valve, and short NPS 3/4

(DN 20) threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as

required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected

to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main

pipe.

P. Install valves according to DIVISION 23, SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

FOR HVAC PIPING.

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges or grooved joints (where authorized) in piping, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, at

final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-

line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) nipple and ball valve in

blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff

connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50).

T. Anchor piping for proper direction of expansion and contraction.

U. Identify piping as specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in DIVISION 23. SECTION 230518 -

ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING.

W. Install no piping in elevator machine rooms, electric rooms and closets, and telephone rooms

and closets.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230529 -

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT. Comply with the

following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 18

B. Seismic restraints are specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

C. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet (6 m) long.

2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m)

or longer.

3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet (6 m) or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.

D. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 7 feet (2.1 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 9 feet (2.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

4. NPS 2 (DN 50): Maximum span, 10 feet (3 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).

5. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): Maximum span, 11 feet (3.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10

mm).

6. NPS 3 (DN 80): Maximum span, 12 feet (3.7 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).





11. NPS 12 (DN 300): Maximum span, 23 feet (7 m); minimum rod size, 7/8 inch (22 mm).

12. NPS 14 (DN 350): Maximum span, 25 feet (7.6 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm).

13. NPS 16 (DN 400): Maximum span, 27 feet (8.2 m); minimum rod size, 1 inch (25 mm).

14. NPS 18 (DN 450): Maximum span, 28 feet (8.5 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches (32

mm).

15. NPS 20 (DN 500): Maximum span, 30 feet (9.1 m); minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches (32

mm).

E. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and

minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20): Maximum span, 5 feet (1.5 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

2. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 6 feet (1.8 m); minimum rod size, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).

3. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 8 feet (2.4 m); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch (10 mm).


F. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot (3-m) intervals between floors.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 19

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections

specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel or groove (where authorized) plain

ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube

end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using

lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"

Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut

threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore

full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service

application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Mechanically Formed, Copper-Tube-Outlet Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and

procedure, and brazed joints.

J. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion

marks on pipe after assembly.

K. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll

grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe

wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid or flexible, where required, grooved-end-

pipe couplings. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable

for the intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved

coupling manufacturer. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and

roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. A factory trained field representative shall

provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 20

of groove, and installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall

periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly

installed products.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as

required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms

only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2

percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install tangential air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2

(DN 50) and larger.

E. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position

with top of funnel not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) above the floor. Install feeder in

minimum NPS 3/4 (DN 20) bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the

main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 (DN 20) pipe from chemical feeder drain,

to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

F. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank

is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment

connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are

installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according

to DIVISION 23, SECTION 230529 - METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING.


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 21

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.

2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens.

4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged

joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to

protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to

freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be

used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use

drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.

4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any

vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to

pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum

yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" values in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building

Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,

joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing

components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing has

been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.

B. Perform these adjustments before operating the system:

1. Open valves to fully open position. Close coil bypass valves.

2. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.

3. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.

4. Check air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).

5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.

6. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.

7. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to design

requirements.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PIPING

232113 - 22

8. Lubricate motors and bearings.

3.10 CLEANING

A. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water. Remove and clean or replace strainer screens.

After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping systems, but before balancing, remove disposable

fine-mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.

3.11 HVAC HYDRONIC Pipe and Fittings Schedule

HVAC HYDRONIC PIPE AND FITTINGS SCHEDULE

Application Pipe Material Weight Joint Type Fittings System

Class Material Max. Temp.

°F

Max. psig

Chilled Water, Condenser Water, Hot Water A53 B ERW Steel

40 Standard

Threaded

Std

Cast Iron

200

250

Chilled Water, Condenser

Water, Hot Water: 2.5 in. to 12 in.

A53 B ERW Steel

40 Standard

CW or Grooved

(where author-ized)

Std Wrought Steel 200 250

Vent Pipe

(All Sizes) A53 B ERW Steel 40 Standard CW Std Wrought Steel N/A 250

Bypass Pipe A53 B ERW Steel 40 Standard Threaded Std Cast Iron 250 125

Drain Pipe

(All Sizes) Copper - Hard Type L Braze N/A

Wrought Cop-

per 200 125

Chemical Treatment and Make-Up Water

(All Sizes)

Copper - Hard Type L Braze Wrought Cop-

per 75 350


NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 1

SECTION 232123

HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.


1. SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT


AND EQUIPMENT.

3. SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT


EQUIPMENT.







1.2 SUMMARY


1. Separately coupled, base-mounted, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

2. Separately coupled vertical inline design pump with integrated controls.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.

C. HI: Hydraulic Institute



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of

product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves, minimum and maximum impeller

size, NPSHR, efficiency lines and bhp lines.

B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates

for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. The wiring diagram shall indicate all

required field and factory wiring, including VFD wiring for pumps installed with VFD.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation, and


E. Comply with pertinent provisions in SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL

REQUIREMENTS.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic

pumps and are based on the specific system indicated.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.

E. Pumps shall comply with the Hydraulic Institute (HI) as referenced in this specification.


A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces

and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe

openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 3

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE,

SECTION 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS



1. Mechanical Seals: One set mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL PUMP REQUIREMENTS

A. Pump Units: Factory assembled and tested with certified performance data & curves.

B. Motors: Include built-in, thermal-overload protection and grease-lubricated ball bearings. Se-

lect each motor to be non-overloading over full range of pump performance curve.

C. Motors: Premium or high efficiency as indicated in Division 23 SECTION 230513 -


2.2 SEPARATELY COUPLED, BASE-MOUNTED, END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries.

3. PACO Pumps.

4. Taco, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, foot mounted or overhung-impeller,

separately coupled, end-suction pump designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts

horizontal. Rate pump for 175-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water

temperature of 225 deg F.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 4

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split, ductile or cast iron, with replaceable bronze wear rings, threaded

gage tappings at inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and

flanged connections. Provide integral mount on volute to support the casing, and attached

piping to allow removal and replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping or

requiring the realignment of pump and motor shaft.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft,

and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match the required performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel

spring, and flexible bellows and gasket.

5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing with

grease fittings.

D. Shaft Coupling: Molded rubber insert and interlocking spider capable of absorbing vibration.

Couplings shall be drop-out type to allow disassembly and removal without removing pump

shaft or motor. Provide EPDM coupling sleeve for variable-speed applications.

E. Coupling Guard: Dual rated; ANSI B15.1, Section 8; OSHA 1910.219 approved; steel;

removable; attached to mounting frame.

F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from

ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and

motor.

G. Motor: Single Speed with grease-lubricated ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; secured

to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. Comply with requirements in DIVISION 23 –

HVAC, SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT.

2.3 SEPARATELY COUPLED VERTICAL INLINE DESIGN PUMP WITH INTEGRATED

CONTROLS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, impeller-between-bearings, separately

coupled, designed for base mounting, with pump and motor shafts vertical. Rate pump for

175-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 150 deg F.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: cast iron with ANSI 125/PN16 flanges. Suction and discharge connections shall

be equally sized ANSI flanges, and shall be drilled and tapped for seal flush and gauge



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 5

connections. Casing supports shall allow removal and replacement of impeller without

disconnecting piping.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, and keyed to

shaft. Trim impeller to match the required performance.

3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.

4. Mechanical Seal: Stainless Steel multi-spring outside balanced type with Viton®

secondary seal, carbon rotating face and silicon carbide stationary seat. Provide a 316

stainless steel gland plate.

D. Shaft Coupling: Rigid spacer type of high tensile aluminum alloy with a fully enclosed ANSI

B15.1 Sect 8 and OSHA 1910.219 compliant guard. Couplings shall allow disassembly and

removal without removing pump shaft or motor. Mounting Frame: Heavy - duty welded-steel

frame and cross members, factory fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M channels and angles.

Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.

E. Motor: Variable speed for use with a VFD, with grease-lubricated ball bearings, unless

otherwise indicated; secured to mounting frame, with adjustable alignment. Comply with

requirements in DIVISION 23 – HVAC, SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR

REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT.

F. Variable speed drive shall be integrated with the motor on motor sizes to 150hp for a self-

contained pump, motor and drive combination to ensure optimum component matching and

protection from motor overloading at any operating point. The pumping package shall be

labeled with ETL listing certification that the product conforms to UL Std 778 and is certified to

CSA Std C22.2 No.108. Drives for motors above 75hp will be supplied as separate items.

G. Drives and controls

1. The Armstrong drive shall be of the VVC-PWM type providing near unity displacement

power factor without the need for external power factor correction capacitors at all loads

and speeds. The VFD shall incorporate DC link chokes for the reduction of mains borne

harmonic currents to reduce the DC link ripple current thereby increasing the DC link

capacitors lifetime. The drive shall be UL and C-UL Listed & CE Marked showing

compliance with both the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and the Low Voltage Directive

72/23/EEC. RFI filters shall be incorporated within the drive to ensure it meets the

emission and immunity requirements of EN61800-3 to the 1st Environment Class C1

(EN55011 unrestricted sales class B). The drive and motor protection shall include:

motor phase to phase fault, motor phase to ground fault, loss of supply phase, over

voltage, under voltage, motor over temperature, inverter overload, over current. Over

current is not allowed ensuring 4300IVS units will not overload the motor at any point in

the operating range of the unit.

2. The drive shall incorporate an integrated graphical user interface that shall provide

running and diagnostic information and identify faults and status in clear English

language. Faults shall be logged / recorded for interrogation at a later date. It shall be

possible to upload parameters from one drive into the non-volatile memory of a

computer and download the parameters into other drives requiring the same settings.

The keypad shall incorporate Hand-Off-Auto pushbuttons to enable switching between



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 6

BMS and manual control. The drive shall incorporate a USB port for direct connection

to a PC and an RS485 connection with Modbus RTU protocol. Optional protocols

available should include BACnet and Lonworks.

3. Sensorless Control software shall be available in the IVS unit to provide automatic speed

control in variable volume systems without the need for pump mounted

(internal/external) or remotely mounted differential pressure system feedback sensor.

Control mode setting and minimum / maximum head set-points shall be set at the factory

and be user adjustable via the inbuilt programming interface.

4. The drive shall have the following additional features: Sensorless override for BMS,

Armstrong IPS pump controller, manual pump control or closed loop PID control;

Programmable skip frequencies and adjustable switching frequency for noise / vibration

control; Auto alarm reset; Motor pre-heat function; Six programmable digital inputs;

Two analogue inputs; One programmable analogue / digital output; Two volt-free

contacts.

H. System control: The pump system shall be capable of operating in any of the following control

modes:

1. Duty Pump and Stand-by pumps with Sensorless Control

2. Duty Pump & Standby pumps with Remote Sensor or building system (BAS) control

3. Multiple Pump with Multiple Sensors System Control, such as Armstrong IPS Controller

2.4 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS

A. Suction Diffuser: Angle pattern, 175-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body and end cap, pump-

inlet fitting; with bronze startup and bronze or stainless-steel permanent strainers; bronze or

stainless-steel straightening vanes; drain plug; and factory-fabricated support.

B. Triple-Duty Valve: Angle or straight pattern, 300-psig pressure rating, cast-iron body, pump-

discharge fitting; with drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features.

Brass gage ports with integral check valve, and orifice for flow measurement. Not applicable to

pumps installed with VFD.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before

pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 7

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 CONCRETE BASES

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers. Refer to

DIVISION 23 – HVAC, SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS and

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE, SECTION 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around full perimeter of base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in DIVISION 03.

3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers,

couplings, and accessories.

C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and

weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

D. Fabricate brackets or supports as required. Hanger and support materials are specified in

DIVISION 23 SECTION HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT.

1. Suspend in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and

pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with

vertical-limit stop]of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices

are specified in SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT, DIVISION 21, SECTION 210548 - VIBRATION

AND SEISMIC CONTROLS VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR FIRE-

SUPPRESSION PIPING AND EQUIPMENT and DIVISION 22, SECTION 220548 -

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .

2. Hanger and support materials are specified in DIVISION 21, SECTION 221529 -

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR FIRE-SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT, DIVISION 22, SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 8

PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT and DIVISION 23, SECTION 230529 -

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before setting. Do not

reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.

1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal wedges with

small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of 3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to

38 mm) between pump base and foundation for grouting.

2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check coupling

faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they are level and plumb.

F. Automatic Centrifugal Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and

extend to open drain as shown on drawings.

3.4 ALIGNMENT

A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation, grout has been

set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping connections have been made.

B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.

C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods specified in HI 1.1-

1.5, "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and Operation."

D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill

baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in

place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other DIVISION 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install triple-duty valve or check valve, shutoff valve and throttling valve on discharge side of

pumps. Pumps installed with VFD shall have check valve and shutoff valve and shall not have

a throttling valve. Pumps installed with VFD shall have check valve and shutoff valve and shall

not have a triple duty valve.



TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 9

F. Install Y-type strainer or suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.

G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between

pump casing and valves.

H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or

install single gage with multiple input selector valve.

I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each centrifugal condensate pump unit discharge.

J. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

K. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

L. Connect wiring according to DIVISION 26, SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Check piping connections for tightness.

3. Clean startup strainers frequently on suction piping. Install new permanent suction

strainer upon turnover to Owner

4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate

until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction. Do not run pumps dry to

check rotation.

5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for

operation.

6. Start motor.

7. Open discharge valve slowly.




TRO No. 2017021

HYDRONIC PUMPS

232123 - 10

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

HVAC MAKEUP-WATER FILTRATION EQUIPMENT

232533 - 1

SECTION 232533


PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following HVAC water filtration equipment:

1. Centrifugal separators.

B. Related Sections:


AND EQUIPMENT.

2. SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.


EQUIPMENT.





EQUIPMENT.


9. DIVISION 26 SECTIONS.



TRO No. 2017021


232533 - 2

1.3 PURPOSE

1.4 A completely assembled package shall be supplied for the isolated recirculation and particle

separation/filtration of the fluid in the cooling tower basin/remote sump in order to prevent

troublesome accumulation of solids in the tower basin/sump. Flow through the separator

package shall be continuous, without interruption for the periodic evacuation of separated

solids.PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A In a recirculating system, given solids with a given solids with a specific gravity of 2.6 and

water at 1.0, 99% performance is predictable to as fine as 25 microns, with correspondingly

higher aggregate performance percentages (up to 80%) of solids as fine as 2 microns.

B. Separator performance must be supported by published independent test results from a

recognized and identified agency. Standard test protocol of upstream injection, downstream

capture and separator purge recovery is allowed with the 50-200 mesh particles to enable

effective, repeatable results. Model tested must be of the same design series as specified unit.


A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and

accessories for the following products:

1. Centrifugal separators.

B. Shop Drawings: Centrifugal separation equipment, maintenance space required, and piping

connections to HVAC systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For centrifugal separators and components, from

manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of

assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate

and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based

and their installation requirements.



TRO No. 2017021


232533 - 3

B. Water Analysis Provider Qualifications: Verification of experience and capability of HVAC

water-treatment service provider.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal separators and controllers to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATORS


following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work

include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of

the following:

1. LAKOS; Claude Laval Corporation.

2. Puroflux Corporation.

3. Griswold Water Systems

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by

a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Description: A tangential inlet and mutually tangential internal accelerating slots shall be

employed to promote the proper velocity necessary for the removal of the separable solids. The

internal accelerating slots shall be spiral-cut for optimal flow transfer, laminar action and

particle influence into the separation barrel. The separator’s internal vortex shall allow this

process to occur without wear to the accelerating slots.

E. Description: Separated particle matter shall spiral downward along the perimeter of the inner

separation barrel, in a manner which does not promote wear of the separation barrel, and into

the solids collection chamber, located below the vortex deflector stool.

F. Description: To insure maximum particle removal characteristics, the separator shall

incorporate a enhanced vortex-induced pressure relief line, drawing specific pressure and fluid

from the separator’s solids collection chamber via the outlet flow’s vortex/venturi effect,

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9099&mf=04&src=wd





TRO No. 2017021


232533 - 4

thereby efficiently encouraging solids into the collection chamber without requiring a

continuous underflow or excessive system fluid loss.

G. System fluid shall exit the separator by following the center vortex in the separation barrel and

spiral upward to the separator outlet.

H. The separator shall feature the following access capabilities for either inspection or the removal

of unusual solids/debris:

1. An upper chamber full sized grooved coupling or flanged top to allow complete ac-

cess to the inlet chamber, acceleration slots, and internal separation barrel.

I. The separator shall be of unishell construction with SA-36, SA-53B or equivalent quality

carbon steel, minimum thickness of .25 inches. Maximum operating pressure shall be 150 psi,

unless specified otherwise.

J. Paint coating shall be oil-based enamel, spray-on, gloss black.

K. Pressure gauges shall be included for the inlet/outlet of the separator. 0-100 psi, glycerin-filled.

L. Inlet & outlet shall be grooved.

M. Purge outlet shall be threaded.

N. Pressure loss shall be between 2-15 psi, remaining constant, varying only when the flow rate

changes.

O. Purging & solids handling: As an alternative evacuation of separated solids may be

accomplished automatically, employing an electric actuated fail safe ball valve (EFS) with

integrally-equipped programming for controlling the frequency and duration of solids purging;

brass ball valve assembly; battery backup style fail safe control.

P. Suction Diffuser

1. Provided with system to protect system pump from damage or fouling

by larger solids or debris.

2. Cast-iron housing; manual-cleaning; 1/8-inch or larger minimum mesh rating; stainless

steel screen.

Q. Circulating Pump: Overhung impeller, close coupled, single stage, end suction, centrifugal.

Comply with UL 778 and with HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron.

2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig minimum.

3. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and

keyed to shaft.

4. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

5. Seal: Mechanical.



TRO No. 2017021


232533 - 5

6. Motor: TEFC motor supported on the pump-bearing frame. General requirements for

motors are specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."

R. Piping: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, F, or E; Grade B, Schedule 40 black steel, with flanged,

grooved, or threaded joints and malleable, steel welding, or ductile-iron fittings.

S. Controls: Automatic control of circulating pump and separator purge; factory wired for single

electrical connection. IEC starter with overload module, HOA selector switch, re-

set/disconnect/trip switch, 120 volt, single phase control voltage, built-in amp meter; automatic

low flow shutdown, BACnet communication and 15 fault log memory.

1. Panel: NEMA-4X UL Listed enclosure.

2. Pump: Automatic and manual switching; manual switch position bypasses safeties and

controls.

3. Separator Purge: Automatic and manual.

4. TSS Controller Interlock: Open separator purge valve with bleed-off control.

T. Valves: Ball valves on purge line for isolation of solids-handling/purging equipment. Provide

inlet/outlet butterfly valve kit.

U. Alternating valve kit shall be provided for the ability to switch the separator system flow from

one cooling tower basin to another based on a time setting. The 3 way valves shall be pre-wired

from the factory and incorporate a time delay relay to initiate valve actuation between the

cooling tower cells. The valves shall be a 3 way butterfly and incorporate factory installed

linkage to open and close each 3 way valve assembly. The actuator shall be electrically

actuated with 120v provided by the main control panel on the separator system. Each valve

assembly will be installed on the outlet of the separator and the inlet strainer prior to the system

pump. Assemblies will be preassembled and shipped loose because of weight and will require

field installation.

V. Support: Skid mounting. Stainless steel, 3/16-inch minimum thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install water filtration equipment on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply

with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section 033000

"Cast-in-Place Concrete."

2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in

Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."



TRO No. 2017021


232533 - 6

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Make piping connections between HVAC water filtration equipment and dissimilar-metal

piping with dielectric fittings. Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water filtration equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty

valves are specified in Section 230523"General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. Confirm

applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical equipment.

E. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service

representative:

1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and

electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been

cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing.

3. Place HVAC water filtration system into operation and calibrate controls during the

preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test

results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for

each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until

it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before

it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,

without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and

allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute

defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.

C. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.




TRO No. 2017021


232533 - 7

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service for separators.


B. Sample separator filtrate after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four

samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain separators.

3.6 WARRANTY

A. Separator shall be warranted to be free of defects in material and workmanship, given the

following terms:

1. Separator: 5 years.

2. All other components: 12 months from date of installation; if installed 6 months or more

after ship date, warranty shall be a maximum of 18 months from ship date.




TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 1

SECTION 233113

METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL





1. SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES.



AND EQUIPMENT.



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

2. Sheet metal materials.

3. Sealants and gaskets.

4. Hangers and supports.

B. Related Sections:

1. DIVISION 23, SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR

HVAC for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. DIVISION 23, SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES for dampers, sound-

control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible

ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint

construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design

criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 2

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the

effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and SMACNA's

"Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems" and International Building

Code.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in

ASHRAE 62.1-2007.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Duct fabrication standards indicating metal gauges, reinforcing, joint construction,

gaskets, and methods of fabrication for each pressure classification and type of system.

2. Adhesives.

3. Sealants and gaskets.

4. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings: CAD-generated and drawn to 1/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:50) scale. Show fabri-

cation and installation details for metal ducts. Submit sheet metal fabrication drawings after all

coordination with specialty trades is completed. Drawings shall indicate the following:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,

and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes.

4. Elevation of top of and bottom of the ducts.

5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.

6. Fittings, transitions and take-offs.

7. Reinforcement and spacing.

8. Seam and joint construction.

9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.

10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.

11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels.

12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic

restraints, and vibration isolation.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and

coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,

building components, and other building services.

2. Suspended ceiling components.

3. Structural members to which duct will be attached.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 3

4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.

6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.

b. Air outlets and inlets.

c. Speakers.

d. Sprinklers.

e. Access panels.

f. Perimeter moldings.

g. Access panels.


E. Submit the following duct system schedule for testing on all systems listed in Part 3 of this Sec-

tion:

1. Prepare and submit a schedule for duct system testing indicating specific dates and pro-

cedures. The Owner and Architect shall be notified a minimum of two (2) weeks before

testing is performed. Coordinate schedule with Section 230593 - “Testing, Adjusting,

and Balancing”.

2. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance

requirements.

F. Field quality-control reports indicating metal gauges, reinforcing, joint construction, gaskets,

and methods of fabrication for each pressure classification and type of system.

G. Comply with pertinent provisions in SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE DATA, SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SECTION

013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

and SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

H. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and installed

accessories and devices.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.

3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 5 - "Systems

and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 4

C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007,

Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-

pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and

other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular

Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-

support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types

and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable

sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct

construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,

seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275).

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for

exposed ducts.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 5

D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, as indicated in the

"Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B,

No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with

mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to

view.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum

ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900

mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).

2.3 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and

gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index

of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


11. VOC: Maximum 395 g/L.

12. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.

13. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

14. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 6

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg (0.14 L/s per

sq. m at 250 Pa) and shall be rated for 10-inch wg (2500-Pa) static-pressure class,

positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.

3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized

rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and

Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and

bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible

with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 7

2.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES

A. Reffer to DEVISION 23 SECTION 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINTS DEVISE

REQUIREMENTS.

PART 3 -

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct

system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and

calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.

Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and

Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure

couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches (300 mm), with a

minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

F. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions

unless specifically indicated.

G. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,

and similar finished work.

H. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for

branch connections.

I. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and

perpendicular to building lines.

J. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

K. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 8

L. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and

enclosures.

M. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to

view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal

flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2

inches (38 mm).

N. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.

Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke

dampers.

O. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign

materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use

two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When

welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,

and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,

hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these

requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct

Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible."

B. See “Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule” for the duct static pressure, seal and leakage

classes,

1. For pressure classes lower than 2-inch wg (500 Pa), seal transverse joints

C. Seal ductwork before insulation is applied.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 9

3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for

construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

3. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Table 4-1 (Table 4-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,

"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and

supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each

branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,

bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16

feet (5 m).

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,

and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Refer to DEVISION 23 SECTION 230548- VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT for Seismic Restraints devise installation requirements.

B. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic

forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint

Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems” and International Building code.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with DIVISION 23,

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES.

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 10

3.7 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have

duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.

Paint materials and application requirements are specified in DIVISION 09, SECTION 099100

- PAINTING.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report

for each test.

2. See “Sheet Metal Duct Construction Schedule” to identify the systems that have to be

tested.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing

and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section

being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system

design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

6. Give fourteen days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC

Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media

shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.9 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 11

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if

required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch

insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with

DIVISION 23, SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES for access panels and

doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply

and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive

assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,

air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and

dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and

mechanical equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

D. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants

from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect

vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under

negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without

damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner

to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated

or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 2006. Keep drain pan operational.

Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and

straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written

instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.



TRO No. 2017021

METAL DUCTS

233113 - 12

3.10 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230593 - TESTING,

ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.

3.13 SHEET METAL DUCT CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

System

Duct

Geometry

Material

Pressure

Class

(in w.g.)

Sealing

Class

Leakage

Class

Press.

Test

Req’d

Exhaust Ductwork

RECT

GSW

-2”

C

24

N

Schedule Legend:

GSW - Galvanized G-90, Single Wall.

ASW - Aluminum ASTM B 209, Single Wall.

SSWE - Stainless Steel ASTM A 480/A 480M, Single Wall, Exposed, Type 316.

SSWC - Stainless Steel ASTM A 480/A 480M, Single Wall, Concealed, Type 304.

CS - 10USSG, Carbon-steel sheet

RS - Round, Spiral Seam.

RECT - Rectangular.

RECT/RO - Rectangular main duct with rectangular or round run-outs to diffusers as shown on draw-

ings.

RW- Round, Welded




TRO No. 2017021

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

233300 - 1

SECTION 233300


PART 1 - GENERAL






2. SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS.



AND EQUIPMENT.



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.

2. Manual volume dampers.

3. Control dampers.

4. Turning vanes.

5. Duct-mounted access doors.

6. Duct accessory hardware.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and

attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.

Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field

assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 2

b. Manual volume damper installations.

c. Control damper installations.

d. Duct-mounted access door installations.

e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and


C. Comply with pertinent provisions in SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND



and SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with

NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for

acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise

indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90 (Z275).

2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on

galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900

mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm).



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 3

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS


following:

1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.

4. Duro Dyne Inc.

5. Greenheck Fan Corporation.

6. Lloyd Industries, Inc.

7. Nailor Industries Inc.

8. NCA Manufacturing, Inc.

9. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.

10. Ruskin Company.

11. SEMCO Incorporated.

12. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm (10 m/s).

D. Maximum System Pressure: 1-inch wg (0.25 kPa).

E. Frame: 0.052-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting

flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch (150-mm) width, 0.060

inch (1.52-mm) thick galvanized steel sheets with V formed reinforcement or 0.063-inch- (1.6-

mm-) thick extruded aluminum sheets, airfoil shaped.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel or Plated steel.

2. Diameter: 0.20 inch (5 mm).

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 4

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.

2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.

3. Electric actuators.

4. Chain pulls.

5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.

a. Sleeve Thickness: 20-gage (1.0-mm) minimum.

b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches (152 mm) minimum.

6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.

7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel or Aluminum.

8. Screen Type: Insect.

9. 90-degree stops.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


following:

a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.

b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.

d. McGill AirFlow LLC.

e. METALAIRE, Inc.

f. Nailor Industries Inc.

g. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.

h. Ruskin Company.

i. Trox USA Inc.

j. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.

3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch (1.62-mm) minimum thickness.

b. Mitered and welded corners.

c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.

b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.

c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.

d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 5

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.

7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze or Molded synthetic.

b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have

axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS

A. Control dampers shall be provided by the ATC (Automatic Temperature Control) contractor and

installed by sheet metal installer.

B. Refer to DEVISION 23 SECTION 230900 INSTRUMENTATIONS AND CONTROLS FOR

HVAC for the types, construction materials and rating requirements of the control dampers.

2.5 TURNING VANES


following:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

2. Duro Dyne Inc.

3. METALAIRE, Inc.

4. SEMCO Incorporated.

5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support

with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated

faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single wall.

E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches (1200 mm) wide and double wall for

larger dimensions.



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 6

2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


following:

1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.

2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.


4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.


6. McGill AirFlow LLC.

7. Nailor Industries Inc.

8. Pottorff; a division of PCI Industries, Inc.

9. Ventfabrics, Inc.

10. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"

and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular.

b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class.

c. Vision panel.

d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam

latches.

e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.

3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash

locks.

b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.

c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two

compression latches with outside and inside handles.

d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and

two compression latches with outside and inside handles.

2.7 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES


following:



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 7


2. Flame Gard, Inc.

3. 3M.

B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.

C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch (1.3-mm) carbon.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.

E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for

minimum 2000 deg F (1093 deg C).

F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa), positive or negative.

2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap

and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to

suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline

and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous

Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in

galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and

aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust

fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend

from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with

hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 8

2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining

accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils.

2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters.

3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.

4. At drain pans and seals.

5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.

6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.

Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure

relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream

from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing.

8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.

9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.

10. Control devices requiring inspection.

11. Elsewhere as indicated.

I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

J. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm).

2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm).

3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm).

4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm).

5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm).

6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).

K. Label access doors according to DIVISION 23, SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR

HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT to indicate the purpose of access door.

L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors

with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

N. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly.



TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 9

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

P. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach

thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement

during start and stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.

2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.

3. Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of

movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.

5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.




TRO No. 2017021


233300 - 10

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

233423 - 1

SECTION 233423


PART 1 - GENERAL





1. DIVISION 26 Sections.


3. SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC


EQUIPMENT

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.

3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.

4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

6. Roof curbs.

7. Fan speed controllers.



TRO No. 2017021


233423 - 2


1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the

items involved:

1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.

3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.

4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with pertinent provisions in SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND



and SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the

AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for

restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.



TRO No. 2017021


233423 - 3

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with

actual equipment provided.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Units furnished shall be complete with all components assembled. All features considered

standard by the manufacturer and which are required to complete the system, and to make it

functional, shall be included without respect to specified detailing in these specifications.

B. Drawings indicate a specific configuration of ductwork at each unit based on required discharge

and intake requirements and taking into account fan rotation. If configuration of the units

furnished on the project differs from that indicated on the drawings (whether or not the units

furnished are the scheduled units, a listed manufacturer or an acceptable substitute), it shall be

the Contractor’s responsibility to modify ductwork, etc., as required to accommodate the actual

configuration of units furnished on the project.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS


following:

1. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd.

2. Carnes Company.


4. Loren Cook Company.

5. Penn Ventilators.



TRO No. 2017021


233423 - 4

B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,

aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward,

with rain and snow drains and grease collector (for grease duct exhaust)].

2. Hinged Subbase: Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and

maintenance.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

D. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing.

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.

3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed and self-aligning ball

bearings.

4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.

5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50

percent.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire.

4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.

5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops.

F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid,

fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as

required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange.

2. Overall Height: 18 inches (450 mm)].

3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation.

4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope.

5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.

6. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides.



TRO No. 2017021


233423 - 5

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and

efficiency requirements for motors specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230513 - COMMON

MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load

will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan

Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300,

"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, and speed of

rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of

Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified

Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support floor mounted units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection as

specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS

FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in

concrete base.

C. Install floor-mounted units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without damage to

equipment, the seismic force required by code. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork

requirements are specified in DIVISION 03, SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE.



TRO No. 2017021


233423 - 6

D. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See DIVISION 07,

SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES for installation of roof curbs.

E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with

vertical-limit stops having a static deflection as specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230548 -

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

G. Label units according to requirements specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230553 -

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other DIVISION 23 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct

connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in DIVISION 23,

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES.

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to DIVISION 26, SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND

BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

D. Connect wiring according to DIVISION 26, SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE

ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES.







1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.

2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connect to ducts

and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection

is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.

4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and

adjust belts, and install belt guards.



TRO No. 2017021


233423 - 7

5. Adjust belt tension.

6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.

8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.

9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to

indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.

10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.

11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

C. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING,

AND BALANCING FOR HVAC for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Refer to

DIVISION 01, SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.




TRO No. 2017021


233423 - 8

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS

236416 - 1

SECTION 236416


PART 1 - GENERAL







AND EQUIPMENT.



EQUIPMENT.





EQUIPMENT.




12. SECTION 230920 - REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM.


14. DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE, 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven centrifugal chillers.

2. Packaged, portable refrigerant recovery units.

3. Variable Frequency Drive Motor controllers.

4. Charge of refrigerant and oil.

5. Microprocess based controls.

6. Accessories.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy

input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

C. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the

total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

D. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit

calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating

conditions.

E. kW/Ton (kW/kW): The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net

refrigerating capacity in tons (kW) at any given set of rating conditions.

F. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit

calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other

than the ARI standard rating conditions.


A. Seismic Performance: Centrifugal chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts

from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully

operational after the seismic event."

B. Chilled Water Temperature Performance:

1. Chiller shall be capable of producing chilled water from 50 deg F (10 deg C) to 38 deg F

(3 deg C) at full rated capacity.

C. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:

1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an

entering condenser-fluid temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C) and providing stable

operation until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering

condenser-fluid temperature.

2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of

continuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-

fluid temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C).

3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with

performance indicated.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 3

D. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude at which installed without affecting

performance indicated.

E. Performance Tolerance: Comply with the tolerances defined by AHRI Standard.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated capacities,

operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1. Chiller capacity. Submit performance data indicating energy input versus cooling load

output from 15 to 100 percent of full load with constant condenser water temperature.

2. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.

3. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.

4. Minimum evaporator flow rate.

5. Minimum condenser flow rate.

6. Fluid capacity of evaporator, condenser.

7. Characteristics of safety relief valves.

8. Minimum entering condenser-fluid temperature.

9. Performance at varying capacities with constant design condenser-fluid temperature.

Repeat performance at varying capacities for different condenser-fluid temperatures from

design to minimum in 5 deg F (3 deg C) increments.

10. Chiller refrigerant, oils, fluids. (include quantities of each)

11. Cooler and condenser construction.

12. Condenser fluid pressure drop.

13. Cooler fluid pressure drop.

14. Compressor data including: compressor type, impeller and shaft construction, lubrication

system, capacity control, refrigerant flow control system, and compressor casing con-

struction.

15. Motor data including: Motor type, voltage, phase, RPM, efficiency, and motor cooling

means.

16. Chiller sound data.

17. Chiller packaged controls including all alarms, diagnostics, display type, features, opera-

tor settings, control system features, and required interfaces with building control system.

18. Weights (shipping, installed, and operating).

19. Furnished accessories including:

a. Thermal insulation, include all components insulated and thermal characteristics of

insulatio

b. Refrigerant containment system including: Refrigerant vessel and pump-out com-

pressor or insulation valves allowing refrigerant to be stored in evaporator or con-

denser vessel.

c. Starter including disconnecting means, starter type, accessories and cabinet enclo-

sure type.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 4

d. Field installed flow switches.

e. Variable frequency drive system.

20. Installation and startup instructions.


1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, load distribution, required

clearances, and method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.


C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown

and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural supports.

2. Piping roughing-in requirements.

3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment.

4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical

equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.

D. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For chillers, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.







F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Startup service reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in emergency, operation, and


I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

J. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND


013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and




TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 5


A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 certification program.

B. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007.

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chillers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, as applicable to chiller design. For chillers charged

with R-134a refrigerant, include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying compliance.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.

G. Comply with requirements of UL, and include label by a qualified testing agency showing

compliance.


A. Ship each chiller with a dry nitrogen charge to eliminate potential charge loss during delivery

and construction. Ship refrigerant in containers separately from chiller.

B. Deliver centrifugal water chillers with protective crating and covering. Leave factory shipping

covers in place until installation.

C. Store chillers to prevent damage and protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, and construction

debris in clean dry space.

D. Handle chillers according to manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for un-

loading, transporting, and setting in final location.

E. The installing contractor shall notify manufacturer two weeks in advance if disassembly or par-

tial disassembly requires for chiller installation. Site disassembly and re-assembly must be su-

pervised or completed by manufacturer service personnel. Start-up shall be performed by au-

thorized manufacturer personnel.

F. Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 6

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace components of chillers that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge.

b. Parts and labor.

c. Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Trane; a division of American Standard.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNIT

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested chiller complete with compressor, compressor

motor, compressor motor controller, lubrication system evaporator, condenser, controls,

variable speed drive, interconnecting unit piping and wiring, mounting frame, and indicated

accessories.

B. Fabricate chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist chiller movement

during a seismic event when chiller is anchored to field support structure.

2.3 COMPRESSOR-DRIVE ASSEMBLY

A. Description: Single-stage or multistage, centrifugal-type compressor driven by an electric

motor.

B. Compressor:



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 7

1. Casing: Cast iron, precision ground.

a. Fully accessible with vertical circular joints, with the complete operating assembly

removable from the compressor and scroll housing.

2. Impeller: High-strength cast aluminum on alloy-steel shaft.

C. Drive: Direct- or gear-drive, open or hermetic design using an electric motor as the driver.

1. Gear Drives: For chillers with gear drives, provide single- or double-helical gear design

continuously coated with oil while chiller is operating. Gears shall comply with

American Gear Manufacturer Association standards.

2. Drive Coupling: For chillers with open drives, provide flexible disc with all-metal

construction and no wearing parts to ensure long life without the need for lubrication.

3. Seals: Seal drive assembly to prevent refrigerant leakage.

D. Compressor Motor:

1. Continuous-duty, squirrel-cage, induction-type, two-pole motor with energy efficiency

required to suit chiller energy efficiency indicated.

2. Factory mounted, aligned, and balanced as part of compressor assembly before shipping.

3. Motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive compressor throughout entire operating

range without overload and with sufficient capacity to start and accelerate compressor

without damage.

4. For chillers with open drives, provide motor with open-drip-proof enclosure.

5. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD in each of three-phase motor windings to monitor

temperature and report information to chiller control panel.

6. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD to monitor bearing temperature and report

information to chiller control panel.

E. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a precision

balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range.

1. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.

2. Vibration Limits: Velocities not to exceed 0.15 inches/s (3.8 mm/s) and 0.8 mils (0.02

mm) peak to peak on all axes.

F. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.

1. Compressor's internal components shall be accessible without having to remove

compressor-drive assembly from chiller.

2. Provide lifting lugs or eyebolts attached to casing.

G. Capacity Control: Modulating, variable-inlet, guide-vane assembly combined with hot-gas

bypass, if necessary, to achieve performance indicated.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 8

1. Maintain stable operation that is free of surge, cavitation, and vibration throughout range

of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient operation possible.

2. Operating Range: From 100 to 15 percent of design capacity.

3. Condenser-Fluid Unloading Requirements over Operating Range: Drop-in entering

condenser-fluid temperature of 2.5 deg F (1.4 deg C) for each 10 percent in capacity

reduction.

4. Chillers shall have variable frequency controllers to modulate compressor speed,

variable-inlet, guide-vane control to achieve optimum energy efficiency and shall be

capable of modulating refrigerant flow to evaporator by variable orifice to improve

uploading capabilities.

5. Avoid use of hot-gas bypass if other options are available to achieve performance

indicated. Apply hot-gas bypass according to ASHRAE/IES 90.1 and governing codes.

H. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump, filtration, heater, cooler, factory-wired power

connection, and controls.

1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup,

coastdown, and standby conditions including power failure.

2. Manufacturer's standard method to remove refrigerant from oil.

3. Oil filter shall be the easily replaceable cartridge type, minimum 0.5-micron efficiency,

with means of positive isolation while servicing.

4. Refrigerant- -cooled oil cooler.

5. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories.

6. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components.

7. Positive visual indication of oil level.

2.4 REFRIGERATION

A. Refrigerant:

1. Type: R-123 ASHRAE 34, Class B1 or R-134a ASHRAE 34, Class A1.

2. Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with

refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures.

B. Refrigerant Flow Control: Variable orifice or Manufacturer's standard refrigerant flow-control

device satisfying performance requirements indicated.

C. Pressure Relief Device:

1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. For Chillers Using R-123: Spring –loaded pressure relief valve, single or multiple

reseating type.

3. For Chillers Using R-134a: ASME-rated, spring-loaded, pressure relief valve; single- or

multiple-reseating type. Pressure relief valve(s) shall be provided for each heat



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 9

exchanger. Condenser shall have dual valves with one being redundant and configured to

allow either valve to be replaced without loss of refrigerant.

D. Refrigeration Transfer: Provide service valves and other factory-installed accessories required

to facilitate transfer of refrigerant from chiller to a remote refrigerant storage and recycling

system. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.

E. Refrigerant Isolation for Chillers Using R-134a: Factory install positive shutoff, manual

isolation valves in the compressor discharge line to the condenser and the refrigerant liquid line

leaving the condenser to allow for isolation and storage of full refrigerant charge in the chiller

condenser shell. In addition, provide isolation valve on suction side of compressor from

evaporator to allow for isolation and storage of full refrigerant charge in the chiller evaporator

shell.

F. Purge System:

1. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), factory

install an automatic purge system for collection and return of refrigerant and lubricating

oil and for removal of noncondensables including, but not limited to, water, water vapor,

and noncondensable gases.

2. System shall be a thermal purge design, refrigerant or air cooled, equipped with a carbon

filter that includes an automatic regeneration cycle.

3. Factory wire to chiller's main power supply and system complete with controls, piping,

and refrigerant valves to isolate the purge system from the chiller.

4. Construct components of noncorrodible materials.

5. Controls shall interface with chiller control panel to indicate modes of operation, set

points, data reports, diagnostics, and alarms.

6. Efficiency of not more than 0.02 lb of refrigerant per pound of air (9 g of refrigerant per

gram of air) when rated according to ARI 580.

7. Operation independent of chiller per ASHRAE 147.

G. Positive-Pressure System:

1. For chillers operating at subatmospheric pressures (using R-123 refrigerant), factory

install an automatic positive-pressure system.

2. During nonoperational periods, positive-pressure system shall automatically maintain a

positive pressure for atmosphere in the refrigerant pressure vessel of not less than 0.5

psig (3 kPa) (adjustable) up to a pressure that remains within the vessel design pressure

limits.

3. System shall be factory wired and include controller, electric heat, pressure transmitter,

or switch.

2.5 EVAPORATOR

A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within

shell. Shell is separate from condenser.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 10

1. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 180 psig (for chillers utilizing R-134a (HFC-134a))

2. Water-Side Working Pressure: 150 psig.

B. Performance shall be based on a water velocity of not less than 3 feet per second and not more

than 12 feet per second with a fouling factor of 0.0001 hr./sq. ft./F/btu

C. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or seamless pipe.

D. Designed to prevent liquid refrigerant carryover from entering compressor.

E. Provide evaporator with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of liquid-

refrigerant level.

F. Tubes:

1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other

tubes.

2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube

sheets.

3. Material: Copper

4. Nominal OD: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

5. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.028”.

6. External Finish: Externally finned.

7. Internal Finish: Enhanced.

G. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to

accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell.

H. Intermediate Tube Sheets: Installed in shell and spaced along length of tube at intervals

required to eliminate vibration and to avoid contact of tubes resulting in abrasion and wear.

I. Water Box:

1. Cast-iron or carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning

of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.

2. Marine type for water box with piping connections.

3. Hinged marine water-box covers.

4. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved with mechanical-joint coupling and flange adapter.

5. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.

6. Fit each water box with 3/4- or 1-inch (19- or 25-mm) drain connection at low point and

vent connection at high point, each with threaded plug.

J. Additional Corrosion Protection:

1. Electrolytic corrosion-inhibitor anode.

2. Coat wetted surfaces with a corrosion-resistant finish.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 11

3. Using same material as tubes, clad surfaces of end tube sheets in contact with fluid. Coat

other wetted surfaces, including water boxes, with a corrosion-resistant finish.

2.6 CONDENSER

A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding tubes within

shell. Shell is separate from evaporator.

1. Refrigerant Working Pressure: 235 psig (for chillers utilizing R-134a (HFC-134a))

2. Water-Side Working Pressure: 150 psig.

B. Water velocity through the condenser tubes of not less than 3 feet per second and not more than

12 feet per second with a fouling factor of 0.00025 hr./sq. ft./F/btu.

C. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or seamless pipe.

D. Designed to prevent direct impingement of high-velocity hot gas from compressor discharge on

tubes.

E. Provide condenser with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of refrigerant

charge and condition.

F. Tubes:

1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets and other

tubes.

2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to intermediate tube

sheets.

3. Material: Copper.

4. Nominal OD: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

5. Minimum Wall Thickness: 0.028”.

6. External Finish: Externally finned.

7. Internal Finish: Enhanced.

G. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to

accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in shell.

H. Intermediate Tube Sheets: Installed in shell and spaced along length of tube at intervals

required to eliminate vibration and to avoid contact of tubes resulting in abrasion and wear.

I. Water Box:

1. Cast-iron or carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and cleaning

of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.

2. Marine type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water box without

piping connections.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 12

3. Hinged marine water-box covers.

4. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved with mechanical-joint coupling and flange adapter.

5. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.

6. Fit each water box 3/4- or 1-inch (19- or 25-mm drain connection at low point and vent

connection at high point, each with threaded plug.

J. Additional Corrosion Protection:

1. Electrolytic corrosion-inhibitor anode.

2. Coat wetted surfaces with a corrosion-resistant finish.

3. Using same material as tubes, clad surfaces of end tube sheets in contact with fluid. Coat

other wetted surfaces, including water boxes, with a corrosion-resistant finish.

2.7 INSULATION

A. Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I for

tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming condensation.

Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator shell and end tube sheets,

evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to

compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.

1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.

2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as

indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces.

3. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier.

4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match other

painted parts.

2.8 ELECTRICAL

A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

B. Single point, field-power connection. A control power transformer internal to the motor

controller/frequency drive and of sufficient size to power all chiller mounted auxiliary loads

shall be supplied. No separate power connection shall be required for chiller mounted

equipment.

C. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wiring

terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 13

2.9 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER

A. Motor controller (Variable Speed Drive-VSD) shall be factory mounted and wired on the chiller

to provide a single-point, field-power termination to the chiller and its auxiliaries. The VSD

shall be shipped completely factory assembled, wired and tested.

B. The VSD will be specifically designed to interface with the centrifugal water chiller controls

and allow for the operating ranges and specific characteristics of the chiller. The VSD control

logic shall optimize chiller efficiency by coordinating compressor motor speed and compressor

inlet guide vane position to maintain the chilled water setpoint while avoiding surge. If a surge

is detected, VSD surge avoidance logic will make adjustments to move away from and avoid

surge at similar conditions in the future.

C. The VSD efficiency shall be 97% or better at full speed and full load. Fundamental

displacement power factor shall be a minimum of 0.96 at all loads.

D. The VSD shall be tested to ANSI/UL Standard 508 and shall be listed by a Nationally

Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as designated by OSHA.

E. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1, with hinged full-front access door with lock and

key. The enclosure shall have as a minimum a short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 65,000

amps per UL508. It shall include three phase input lugs plus a grounding lug for electrical

connections, output motor connection via factory installed bus bars and all components shall be

properly segregated and completely enclosed in a single metal enclosure. Enclosure shall

include a padlockable, door-mounted circuit breaker with shunt trip and AIC rating of 65,000

amps. The entire chiller package shall be UL/CUL listed.

F. Cooling: Refrigerant cooled.

G. Power semi-conductor and capacitor cooling shall be from a liquid cooled heatsink.

H. Technology: The VSD shall be solid state, microprocessor based pulse-width modulated

(PWM) design. The VSD shall be voltage and current regulated. Output power devices shall be

IGBT transistors.

I. The VSD design shall include a standard integrated active rectification control system to limit

total demand distortion (TDD) in current at the VSD to less than or equal to 5% as measured at

the VSD input, in compliance to recommendations stated in IEEE 519-1992.

J. Input shall be nominal 480 volts, three phase, 60 hertz AC power, ± 10 percent of nominal

voltage. Line frequency 38-60 hertz.

K. The VSD shall include the following features :

1. All control circuit voltages are physically and electrically isolated from power circuit

voltage.

2. 150% instantaneous torque available for improved surge control.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 14

3. Soft start, adjustable linear acceleration, coast-to-stop.

4. Insensitivity to incoming power phase sequence.

5. Adjustable current limiting and U.L. approved electronic motor overload protection.

6. Output line-to-line short circuit protection.

7. Line-to-ground short circuit protection.

8. Protection from phase loss at AFD input.

9. Protection from phase reversal/imbalance.

10. Protection from over/under-voltage.

11. Protection from over-temperature.

L. The following VSD status indicators shall be available to facilitate startup and maintenance:

1. Output speed in hertz and rpm.

2. Input line voltage.

3. Input line kW.

4. Output/load amps.

5. Average current in percent RLA.

6. Load power factor.

7. Fault.

8. VSD transistor temperature.

M. Service Conditions - at full output power:

1. No external venting or heat exchangers shall be required.

2. Operating ambient temperature of 32°F - 104°F (0°C - 40°C).

3. Room ambient up to 95% relative humidity.

4. Elevation up to 3300 feet (1000 meters).

2.10 CONTROLS

A. Control: Stand-alone and microprocessor based, with all memory stored in nonvolatile memory

so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power. A dedicated chiller control

panel shall be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. The chiller control panel

shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring of chiller modules, sensors, actuators,

relays and switches. The chiller control panel shall include controls to safely and efficiently

operate the chiller.

B. Provide chillers with quick start control enabling the chiller controller to rapidly restart and load

the chiller and deliver chilled water at set point temperature following a power interruption

event. The quick start feature shall ensure pre-rotation (capacity control) vanes remain open

following a power interruption event and quick ramp up speed logic is employed to facilitate

shortest time to deliver chilled water at set point temperature. The chiller operation shall

automatically restore to 80% of full load within 5 minutes.

C. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 hinged or lockable; factory wired.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 15

D. The chiller manufacturer shall include a pressure, non-mechanical based flow switch that is of

the thermal dispersion type for each evaporator and condenser to verify flow through the unit.

E. The chiller control panel shall provide individual relay outputs to start/stop the evaporator and

condenser water pumps. The condenser water pump relay output can be used to enable the

cooling tower temperature controls.

F. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of

information and with touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either

imperial or metric units selectable through the interface, display the following information:

1. Date and time.

2. Operating or alarm status.

3. Fault history with not less than last 10 faults displayed.

4. Set points of controllable parameters.

5. Trend data.

6. Operating hours.

7. Number of chiller starts.

8. Outdoor-air temperature or space temperature if required for chilled-water reset.

9. Entering- and leaving-fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

10. Difference in fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

11. Fluid flow of evaporator and condenser.

12. Fluid pressure drops of evaporator and condenser.

13. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser.

14. Refrigerant saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser shell.

15. Compressor refrigerant suction and discharge temperature.

16. Compressor bearing temperature.

17. Motor bearing temperature.

18. Motor winding temperature.

19. Oil temperature.

20. Oil discharge pressure.

21. Phase current.

22. Percent of motor rated load amperage.

23. Phase voltage.

24. Demand power (kilowatts).

25. Energy use (kilowatt-hours).

26. Power factor.

27. For chillers equipped with variable frequency controllers and harmonic filters, include the

following:

a. Output voltage and frequency.

b. Voltage total harmonic distortion for each phase.

c. Supply current total demand distortion for each phase.

d. Inlet vane position.

e. Controller internal ambient temperature.

f. Heatsink temperature.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 16

28. Purge suction temperature if purge system is provided.

29. Purge elapsed time if purge system is provided.

G. Control Functions:

1. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.

2. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load limits.

Evaporator fluid temperature shall be reset based on return water temperature.

3. Current limit and demand limit.

4. Condenser-fluid temperature.

5. External chiller emergency stop.

6. Variable evaporator flow.

7. Thermal storage.

H. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and require

manual reset:

1. Low evaporator pressure or temperature; high condenser pressure.

2. Low evaporator fluid temperature.

3. Low oil differential pressure.

4. High or low oil pressure.

5. High or low oil temperature.

6. High compressor-discharge temperature.

7. Loss of condenser-fluid flow.

8. Loss of evaporator fluid flow.

9. Motor overcurrent.

10. Motor overvoltage.

11. Motor undervoltage.

12. Motor phase reversal.

13. Motor phase failure.

14. Sensor- or detection-circuit fault.

15. Processor communication loss.

16. Motor controller fault.

17. Extended compressor surge.

18. Excessive air-leakage detection for chillers using R-123 refrigerant.

19. High motor winding temperatures.

20. High bearing temperatures.

I. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an

adjustable period and frequency of polling.

J. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and

password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, operate,

and service.

K. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local

automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 17

L. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of

connecting a printer and a notebook computer.

M. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control,

and display chiller status and alarms.

1. Industry-accepted, open-protocol communication interface with the BAS shall enable the

BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator workstation.

Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be

available through the BAS. The following data must be communicated at a minimum:

a. Remote chiller start/stop.

b. Evaporator flow rate (GPM)

c. Condenser flow rate (GPM)

d. Evaporator differential pressure (psid)

e. Condenser differential pressure (psid)

f. Evaporator capacity (Tons)

g. Chilled water entering and leaving temperatures

h. Reset leaving chilled water temperature. (4-20mA signal)

i. Condenser(s) water entering and leaving temperatures

j. Reset demand or current limit. (4-20mA signal)

k. Common alarm for any safety requiring a manual reset of chiller.

l. Analog output signal indicating compressor motor percent RLA.

m. Compressor running.

n. Chiller operating at maximum capacity.

o. Initialization of free cooling cycle.

p. Analog output signal indicating evaporator pressure.

q. Analog output signal indicating condenser pressure.

r. Analog output signal indicating oil pressure.

s. Analog output signal indicating oil temperature.

t. Analog output signal indicating refrigerant level.

u. Analog output signal indicating accumulated operating hours.

v. Analog output signal indicating accumulated system starts.

w. Digital output signal indicating vent valve status.

x. Operating, safety shutdown, and cycling codes shall be available to the BMS sys-

tem.

y. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) output voltage.

z. VFD Input KW.

aa. VFD output frequency.

2.11 FINISH

A. Paint chiller, using manufacturer's standard procedures, except comply with the following

minimum requirements:



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 18

1. Provide at least one coat of primer with a total dry film thickness of at least 2 mils (0.05

mm).

2. Provide at least two coats of alkyd-modified, vinyl enamel, epoxy, polyurethane finish

with a total dry film thickness of at least 4 mils (0.10 mm).

3. Paint surfaces that are to be insulated before applying the insulation.

4. Paint installed insulation to match adjacent uninsulated surfaces.

5. Color of finish coat to be manufacturer's standard.

B. Provide Owner with quart container of paint used in application of topcoat to use in touchup

applications after Project Closeout.

2.12 ACCESSORIES

A. Vibration Isolation:

1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish vibration isolation for each chiller.

2. Neoprene Pad:

a. Two layers of 0.375-inch- (10-mm-) thick, ribbed- or waffle-pattern neoprene pads

separated by a 16-gage, stainless-steel plate.

b. Fabricate pads from 40- to 50-durometer neoprene.

c. Provide stainless-steel square bearing plate to load the pad uniformly between 20

and 40 psig (138 and 276 kPa) with a 0.12- to 0.16-inch (3- to 4-mm) deflection.

B. Tool Kit: Chiller manufacturer shall assemble a tool kit specially designed for use in serving

the chiller(s) furnished. Include special tools required to service chiller components not readily

available to Owner service personnel in performing routine maintenance. Place tools in a

lockable case with hinged cover. Provide a list of each tool furnished and attach the list to

underside of case cover.

2.13 PACKAGED REFRIGERANT RECOVERY UNITS

A. Packaged refrigerant recovery unit consisting of compressor, air-cooled condenser, recovery

system, tank pressure gages, filter-dryer, and valving that allows for switching between liquid

and vapor recovery mode. Refrigerant recovery unit shall be factory mounted on an ASME-

constructed and -stamped refrigerant storage vessel that is sized to hold the full refrigerant

charge of the largest chiller furnished.


A. Perform functional run tests of chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 19

1. Test the following conditions:

a. Design conditions indicated.

b. Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of 25 percent with

varying entering condenser-fluid temperature from design to minimum conditions

in 5 deg F (3 deg C) increments.

c. At four point(s) of varying part-load performance to be selected by Owner at time

of test.

2. Allow Owner, contractor, and project Engineer access to place where chillers are being

tested. Notify Owner and project Engineer 14 days in advance of testing.

3. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results.

Submit copy of results within one week of test date.

C. For chillers using R-134a refrigerant, factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser

according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. For chillers using R-123 refrigerant, factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser

according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Pressure test

fluid side of heat exchangers, including water boxes, to 1.5 times the rated pressure. Pressure

proof test refrigerant side of heat exchangers to a minimum of 45 psig (310 kPa). Vacuum and

pressure test for leaks.

E. For chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine chillers before installation. Reject chillers that are damaged.

B. Examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and

electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting chiller

performance, maintenance, and operations before equipment installation.

1. Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations

before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.


3.2 CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install chiller on concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete

bases specified in DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE, 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE



TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 20

B. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install

dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.






C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Charge chiller with refrigerant and fill with oil if not factory installed.

E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 232113 -

HYDRONIC PIPING. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and

specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with components shown on

drawings. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

D. Condenser-Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with components shown on

drawings. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, extend separate

vent piping for each chiller to the outdoors without valves or restrictions. Comply with

ASHRAE 15. Connect to chiller pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with

drain valve.

F. For chillers equipped with a purge system, extend separate purge vent piping for each chiller to

the outdoors. Comply with ASHRAE 15 and ASHRAE 147.

G. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size of

connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection.

3.4 START-UP SERVICE





TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 21

2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.

3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.

4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.

5. Operate chiller for run-in period.

6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.

7. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented outside.

8. Verify proper motor rotation.

9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup

and shutdown.

10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for

evaporator and condenser.

11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.

12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical

connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.

C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions. Refer to





TRO No. 2017021


236416 - 22

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLER WITH MAGNETIC BEARING

236436-1

SECTION 236436


PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi-

tions and DIVISION 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


1. SECTION 230100 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS


AND EQUIPMENT.



EQUIPMENT.





EQUIPMENT.




12. SECTION 230920 - REFRIGERANT DETECTION AND ALARM.


14. DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE, 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes design, performance, refrigerant, controls and installation requirements

for the packaged, water-cooled centrifugal water chillers including the following:

1. Microprocessor-based controls.

2. Variable Frequency Controllers.

3. Refrigerant Containment System. (Refrigerant vessel and pump-out compressor)

4. Marine Water Boxes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



TRO No. 2017021


236436-2

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy

input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

C. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the

total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

D. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit calcu-

lated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating conditions.

E. kW/Ton (kW/kW): The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerat-

ing capacity in tons (kW) at any given set of rating conditions.

F. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit cal-

culated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other

than the ARI standard rating conditions.


A. Seismic Performance: Centrifugal chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions de-

termined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




B. Chilled Water Temperature Performance:

1. Chiller shall be capable of producing chilled water from 50 deg F (10 deg C) to 38 deg F

(3 deg C) at full rated capacity.

C. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:

1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an enter-

ing condenser-fluid temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C) and providing stable operation

until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering condenser-

fluid temperature.

2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of continu-

ous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-fluid

temperature of 55 deg F (13 deg C).

3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with per-

formance indicated.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-3

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operat-

ing characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1. Chiller capacity. Submit performance data indicating energy input versus cooling load

output from 15 to 100 percent of full load with constant condenser water temperature.

2. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.

3. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.

4. Minimum evaporator flow rate.

5. Minimum condenser flow rate.

6. Refrigerant capacity of chiller.

7. Fluid capacity of evaporator, condenser.

8. Characteristics of safety relief valves.

9. Minimum entering condenser-fluid temperature.

10. Performance at varying capacities with constant design condenser-fluid temperature. Re-

peat performance at varying capacities for different condenser-fluid temperatures from

design to minimum in 5 deg F (3 deg C) increments.

11. Cooler and condenser construction.

12. Condenser fluid pressure drop.

13. Cooler fluid pressure drop.

14. Compressor data including: compressor type, impeller and shaft construction, lubrication

system, capacity control, refrigerant flow control system, and compressor casing con-

struction.

15. Motor data including: Motor type, voltage, phase, RPM, efficiency, and motor cooling

means.

16. Chiller sound data.

17. Chiller packaged controls including all alarms, diagnostics, display type, features, opera-

tor settings, control system features, and required interfaces with building control system.

18. Weights (shipping, installed, and operating).

19. Furnished accessories including thermal insulation, field installed flow switches, and var-

iable frequency drive system.

20. Installation and start-up instructions.


1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, load distribution, required

clearances, and method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field

connection.


C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown

and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:





TRO No. 2017021


236436-4




D. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For chillers, accessories, and components, from manufac-

turer.








G. Startup service reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in emergency, operation, and


I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

J. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823 - Operation and Maintenance DATA,

Section 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES, SECTION 013300 -Submittal

PROCEDURES, Section 017700 - Closeout PROCEDURES and SECTION 230100 - Basic

Mechanical Requirements.


A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 certification program.

B. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590.

C. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-5

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chillers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, as applicable to chiller design. For chillers charged

with R-134a refrigerant, include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying compliance.


G. Comply with requirements of UL, and include label by a qualified testing agency showing

compliance.


A. Ship water chillers from the factory completely assembled and fully charged with refrigerant

and ready for field knockdown.

B. Deliver centrifugal water chillers with protective crating and a weather resistant cover. Leave

factory shipping covers in place until installation.

C. Store chillers to prevent damage and protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, and construction

debris in clean dry space.

D. Handle chillers according to manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for un-

loading, transporting, and setting in final location.

E. The installing contractor shall notify manufacturer if disassembly or partial disassembly re-

quires for chiller installation. Site disassembly and re-assembly must be supervised or complet-

ed by manufacturer service personnel. Start-up shall be performed by authorized manufacturer

personnel.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases.

1.9 WARRANTY


replace components of chillers that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty

period.

1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil charge.

b. Parts and labor.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-6

c. Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


lowing:

1. Daikin.

2.2 PACKAGED WATER CHILLERS

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested water chiller complete with compressor, evapora-

tor, condenser, controls, interconnecting unit piping and wiring, indicated accessories, and

mounting frame. Each chiller shall be a complete multi-stage, oil free, magnetic bearing, semi-

hermetic centrifugal compressors. Each compressor shall have an integrated variable frequency

drive operating with inlet guide vanes for optimized unit performance under part load efficien-

cy. Chiller shall be charged with refrigerant HFC-134a

B. Each chiller shall be factory run-tested under load conditions for a minimum of one hour on an

AHRI certified test stand with evaporator and condenser water flow at job conditions. Operating

controls shall be adjusted and checked. The refrigerant charge shall be adjusted for optimum

operation and recorded on the unit nameplate

C. Fabricate water chiller mounting frame and attachment to the pressure vessel with reinforce-

ment strong enough to resist water chiller movement during a seismic event when the water

chiller mounting frame is anchored to the building structure.

D. Performance: Refer to the schedule of performance on the drawings. Performance shall be in

accordance with applicable ARI Standard.

2.3 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant: R-134a (HFC-134a); full operating charge of refrigerant.

B. Refrigerant Compatibility: Seals, O-rings, motor windings, and internal water chiller parts ex-

posed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall

be rated for refrigerant pressures.

C. Vent Pipe: Provide black steel vent pipe from safety relief valve(s) to exterior of building.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-7

2.4 COMPRESSORS AND COMPRESSOR MOTOR

A. Refer to DIVISION 23 SECTION "COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT " FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. The chiller shall utilize magnetic bearing, oil-free, semi-hermetic centrifugal compressors. The

compressor drive train shall be capable of coming to a controlled, safe stop in the event of a

power failure by diverting stored power to the magnetic bearing controls system.

C. The motor shall be of the semi-hermetic type, liquid refrigerant cooled with internal thermal

sensing devices in the stator windings. The motor shall be designed for variable frequency drive

operation.

D. The chiller shall be equipped with a refrigerant cooled and integrated Variable Frequency Drive

(VFD) to automatically regulate compressor speed in response to cooling load and the compres-

sor pressure lift requirement. Movable inlet guide vanes and variable compressor speed acting

together, shall provide unloading. The chiller controls shall coordinate compressor speed and

guide vane position to optimize chiller efficiency.

E. Each compressor circuit shall be equipped with a 5% line reactor to help protect against incom-

ing power surges and help reduce harmonic distortion.

F. Unit shall meet the requirements of ASHRAE 15

2.5 EVAPORATOR AND CONDENSER

A. The evaporator and condenser shall be separate vessels of the shell-and-tube type, designed,

constructed, tested and stamped according to the requirements of the ASME Code, Section VIII.

The tubes shall be individually replaceable and secured to the intermediate supports without

rolling or expanding to facilitate replacement if required.

B. The evaporator shall be flooded type with 0.028 in. wall copper internally and externally en-

hanced tubes rolled into carbon steel tubesheets. The water side shall be designed for a mini-

mum of 150 psig. The heads shall be carbon steel. Water connections shall be grooved suitable

for Victaulic couplings. The evaporator shall be equipped with marine water boxes with re-

movable covers and vent and drain connections.

C. The condenser shall have 0.028 in. wall copper internally and externally enhanced tubes rolled

into carbon steel. Water connections shall be grooved suitable for Victaulic couplings. The wa-

ter side shall be designed for a minimum of 150 psig. The condenser shall be equipped with ma-

rine water boxes with removable covers and vent and drain connections. The heads shall be car-

bon steel.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-8

D. Provide sufficient isolation valves and condenser volume to hold the full unit refrigerant charge

in the condenser during servicing or provide a separate pump-out system and storage tank suffi-

cient to hold the charge of the largest unit being furnished.

E. Provide an electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow to the evaporator. Fixed orifice

devices or float controls with hot gas bypass are not acceptable because of inefficient control at

low load conditions. The liquid line shall have moisture indicating sight glass.

F. Provide re-seating type spring loaded pressure relief valves according to ASHRAE-15 safety

code. The evaporator shall be provided with single or multiple valves. The condenser shall be

provided with dual relief valves equipped with a transfer valve so one relief valve can be re-

moved for testing or replacement without loss of refrigerant or removal of refrigerant from the

condenser. Rupture disks are not acceptable.

G. Provide factory-mounted and wired, thermal-dispersion water flow switches on each vessel to

prevent unit operation with no or low water flow.

2.6 INSULATION

A. Cold Surfaces: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with

ASTM C 534, Type II, for sheet materials.

1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm).

2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.

3. Factory apply insulation over all cold surfaces of water chiller capable of forming con-

densation. Components shall include evaporator shell and end tube sheets, evaporator

water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction pipe from evaporator to compressor,

cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.

a. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.

b. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and paint as

indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted steel surfaces.

c. Seal seams and joints.

d. After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of protective coating to insulation.

2.7 CONTROLS

A. Control: Stand-alone and microprocessor based, with all memory stored in nonvolatile

memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical power. A dedicated chiller

control panel shall be supplied with each chiller by the chiller manufacturer. The chiller control

panel shall provide control of chiller operation and monitoring of chiller modules, sensors, actu-

ators, relays and switches. The chiller control panel shall include controls to safely and effi-

ciently operate the chiller.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-9

B. Enclosure: Unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure, hinged or lockable; factory wired.

C. The chiller shall be able to maintain operation during a momentary power loss event lasting up

o 5 seconds when operating at standard AHRI load and lift conditions. The chiller shall be able

to ride through this momentary power loss event without shutting down.

D. The chiller control panel shall be capable of automatic control of evaporator and condenser wa-

ter pumps. The condenser water pump relay output can be used to enable the cooling tower

temperature controls.

E. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of infor-

mation and with touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either imperi-

al or metric units selectable through the interface, display the following information:

1. Date and time.

2. Operating or alarm status.

3. Fault history with not less than last 10 faults displayed.

4. Set points of controllable parameters.

5. Trend data.

6. Operating hours.

7. Number of chiller starts.

8. Outdoor-air temperature or space temperature if required for chilled-water reset.

9. Entering- and leaving-fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

10. Difference in fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.

11. Fluid flow of evaporator and condenser.

12. Fluid pressure drops of evaporator and condenser.

13. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser.

14. Refrigerant saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser shell.

15. Compressor refrigerant suction and discharge temperature.

16. Compressor bearing temperature.

17. Motor bearing temperature.

18. Motor winding temperature.

19. Phase current.

20. Percent of motor rated load amperage.

21. Percent of 100%compressor speed.

22. Phase voltage.

23. Demand power (kilowatts).

24. Energy use (kilowatt-hours).

25. Power factor.

26. For chillers equipped with variable frequency controllers and harmonic filters, include the

following:

a. Output voltage and frequency.

b. Voltage total harmonic distortion for each phase.

c. Supply current total demand distortion for each phase.

d. Inlet vane position.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-10

e. Controller internal ambient temperature.

f. Heatsink temperature.

F. Control Functions:

1. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.

2. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load limits.

Evaporator fluid temperature shall be reset based on return water temperature.

3. Current limit and demand limit.

4. Condenser-fluid temperature.

5. External chiller emergency stop.

6. Variable evaporator flow.

7. Thermal storage.

G. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and require

manual reset:

1. Low evaporator pressure or temperature; high condenser pressure.

2. Low evaporator fluid temperature.

3. High compressor-discharge temperature.

4. Loss of condenser-fluid flow.

5. Loss of evaporator fluid flow.

6. Motor overcurrent.

7. Motor overvoltage.

8. Motor undervoltage.

9. Motor phase reversal.

10. Motor phase failure.

11. Sensor- or detection-circuit fault.

12. Processor communication loss.

13. Motor controller fault.

14. Extended compressor surge.

H. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an ad-

justable period and frequency of polling.

I. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and pass-

word with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, operate, and

service.

J. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local automat-

ic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.

K. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable of connect-

ing a printer and a notebook computer.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-11

L. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control,

and display chiller status and alarms.

1. Industry-accepted, open-protocol communication interface with the BAS shall enable the

BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator workstation.

Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be

available through the BAS. The following data must be communicated at a minimum:

a. Remote chiller start/stop.

b. Evaporator flow rate (GPM)

c. Condenser flow rate (GPM)

d. Evaporator differential pressure (psid)

e. Condenser differential pressure (psid)

f. Evaporator capacity (Tons)

g. Chilled water entering and leaving temperatures

h. Reset leaving chilled water temperature. (4-20mA signal)

i. Condenser(s) water entering and leaving temperatures

j. Reset demand or current limit. (4-20mA signal)

k. Common alarm for any safety requiring a manual reset of chiller.

l. Analog output signal indicating compressor motor percent RLA.

m. Compressor running.

n. Chiller operating at maximum capacity.

o. Initialization of free cooling cycle.

p. Analog output signal indicating evaporator pressure.

q. Analog output signal indicating condenser pressure.

r. Analog output signal indicating oil pressure.

s. Analog output signal indicating oil temperature.

t. Analog output signal indicating refrigerant level.

u. Analog output signal indicating accumulated operating hours.

v. Analog output signal indicating accumulated system starts.

w. Digital output signal indicating vent valve status.

x. Operating, safety shutdown, and cycling codes shall be available to the BMS sys-

tem.

y. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) output voltage.

z. VFD Input KW.

aa. VFD output frequency.

2.8 .ELECTRICAL

A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.

B. Single point connection to compressor power panel. A control power transformer internal to the

motor controller/frequency drive and of sufficient size to power all chiller mounted auxiliary

loads shall be supplied. No separate power connection shall be required for chiller mounted

equipment.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-12

C. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram. Spare wiring

terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.

2.9 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY CONTROLLERS

A. The chiller shall be equipped with a refrigerant cooled and integral Variable Frequency Drive

(VFD). Control should include the following:

1. High short circuit panel rating with a matching circuit breaker

2. Phase loss protection

3. Under/over voltage protection

4. Ground Fault Protection to reduce the arcing ground fault damage from line-to ground

fault currents less than those required for conductor protection

B. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1, with hinged full-front access door with lock and

key. The enclosure shall have as a minimum a short circuit current rating (SCCR) of 65,000

amps per UL508. It shall include three phase input lugs plus a grounding lug for electrical con-

nections, output motor connection via factory installed bus bars and all components shall be

properly segregated and completely enclosed in a single metal enclosure. Enclosure shall in-

clude a padlockable, door-mounted circuit breaker with shunt trip and AIC rating of 65,000

amps. The entire chiller package shall be UL/CUL listed.

C. The VSD design shall include a standard integrated active rectification control system to limit

total demand distortion (TDD) in current at the VSD to less than or equal to 5% as measured at

the VSD input, in compliance to recommendations stated in IEEE 519-1992.

2.10 Vibration Isolation

A. Provide neoprene waffle-type vibration isolators for each corner of the unit.

2.11 FINISH

A. Paint chiller, using manufacturer's standard procedures, except comply with the following min-

imum requirements:

1. Provide at least one coat of primer with a total dry film thickness of at least 2 mils (0.05

mm).

2. Provide at least two coats of alkyd-modified, vinyl enamel, epoxy, polyurethane finish

with a total dry film thickness of at least 4 mils (0.10 mm).

3. Paint surfaces that are to be insulated before applying the insulation.

4. Paint installed insulation to match adjacent uninsulated surfaces.

5. Color of finish coat to be manufacturer's standard.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-13

B. Provide Owner with quart container of paint used in application of topcoat to use in touchup ap-

plications after Project Closeout.

2.12 Tool Kit: Chiller manufacturer shall assemble a tool kit specially designed for use in serving

the chiller(s) furnished. Include special tools required to service chiller components not readily

available to Owner service personnel in performing routine maintenance. Place tools in a lock-

able case with hinged cover. Provide a list of each tool furnished and attach the list to underside

of case cover.

2.13 FACTORY TESTING

A. Perform functional run tests of chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.

1. Test the following conditions:

a. Design conditions indicated.

b. Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of 25 percent with

varying entering condenser-fluid temperature from design to minimum conditions

in 5 deg F (3 deg C) increments.

c. At four point(s) of varying part-load performance to be selected by Owner at time

of test.

2. Allow Owner, contractor, and project Engineer access to place where chillers are being

tested. Notify Owner and project Engineer 14 days in advance of testing.

3. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results.

Submit copy of results within one week of test date.

C. For chillers using R-134a refrigerant, factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser accord-

ing to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. For chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt

sizes and locations, piping, and electrical to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions

affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-14

1. Final water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install chillers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer.

C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Install water chiller on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in DIVISION 3 –

CONCRETE, 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.

E. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install

dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.



2. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instruc-

tions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.


F. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Chilled- and condenser-water piping installation requirements are specified in DIVISION 23

SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping,

fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to water chillers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Connections: Connect inlet to evaporator with components shown on drawings.

Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

D. Condenser Connections: Connect inlet to condenser with components shown on drawings.

Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling.

E. Field-insulate any surfaces where condensation might occur that were not otherwise factory in-

sulated.



TRO No. 2017021


236436-15

F. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Valve Connections: Install separate refrigerant vent piping from

each chiller’s safety relief valve(s) or rupture disc(s) to an approved location at the exterior of

the building without valves or restrictions. The refrigerant vent piping shall be installed in ac-

cordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and with ASHRAE 15. Connect to chiller

pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with drain valve.

G. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size of

connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection. .

3.4 START-UP SERVICE



2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.

3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.

4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.

5. Operate chiller for run-in period.

6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented outside.

7. Verify proper motor rotation.

8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup

and shutdown.

9. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for evapora-

tor and condenser.

10. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.

11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connec-

tions for proper assembly, installation, and connection.

C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions. Refer to





TRO No. 2017021


236436-16

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 1

SECTION 236500

COOLING TOWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL






AND EQUIPMENT.



EQUIPMENT.






EQUIPMENT.





1.2 SUMMARY


1. Open-circuit, induced-draft, crossflow cooling towers.

B. All water input to the cooling tower must be treated by the chemical water treatment system

prior to operation of the tower. Operation of the tower without pretreated fill water is strictly

prohibited.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BMS: Building management system.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 2

B. FRP: Fiber-reinforced polyester.


C. Delegated Design: Design cooling tower support structure and seismic restraints and wind

restraints, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,

using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

D. Structural Performance: Cooling tower support structure shall withstand the effects of gravity

loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated

according to SEI/ASCE 7

E. Seismic Performance: Cooling towers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.



operational after the seismic even."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, pressure drop, fan

performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated, furnished specialties, and

accessories.

1. Maximum flow rate.

2. Minimum flow rate.

3. Drift loss as percent of design flow rate.

4. Sound power levels in eight octave bands for operation with fans off, fans at minimum,

and design speed.

5. Performance curves for the following:

a. Varying entering-water temperatures from design to minimum.

b. Varying ambient wet-bulb temperatures from design to minimum.

c. Varying water flow rates from design to minimum.

d. Varying fan operation (off, minimum, and design speed).

6. Fan airflow, brake horsepower, and drive losses.

7. Motor amperage, efficiency, and power factor at 100, 75, 50, and 25 percent of nameplate

horsepower.

8. Electrical power requirements for each cooling tower component requiring power.

B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of cooling tower assemblies, control

panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 3

1. Assembled unit dimensions.

2. Weight and load distribution.

3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.

4. Sizes and locations of piping and wiring connections.


C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cooling tower support structure indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the

qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of support structure.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases,

rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and wind restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown

and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:






E. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For cooling towers, accessories, and components, from

manufacturers.







G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Startup service reports.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 4

K. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

L. Comply with pertinent provisions of SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND


013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES and



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI.



C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-

2007, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat-exchanger coils to comply with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

E. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201,

"Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal Performance."

F. FMG approval and listing in the latest edition of Fig's "Approval Guide."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures.

1.6 WARRANTY


replace the following components of cooling towers that fail in materials or workmanship

within specified warranty period:

1. Fan assembly including fan, drive, and motor.

2. All components of cooling tower.

3. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 5

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPEN-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT, CROSSFLOW COOLING TOWERS

A. Factory Mutual Approved Model: The tower shall be listed in the current FM Approval Guide

(approvalguide.com) and conform to the FM Approval Standard for Cooling Towers, Class

Number 4930 that is approved for use without sprinkler systems. The tower shall have

successfully passed full scale fire testing, static and cyclic wind pressure testing, large missile

impact testing (for Zone HM), and structural design evaluation as administered by FM-

Approvals. The tower shall be capable of +70/-140 psf for Zone H as defined by FM Global. A

copy of the FM Approval Certificate of Compliance, dated November 2013 or later shall be

available upon request.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Marley Cooling Technologies, and SPX Corporation

2. Baltimore Aircoil Company;

C. The tower structure, anchorage and all its components shall be designed by licensed

professional engineers, employed by the manufacturer, per the International Building Code to

withstand a wind load of 30 psf, as well as a .3g seismic load. The fan deck, hot-water basin

covers and, where specified, maintenance platforms shall be designed for 60 psf live load or a

200 lb concentrated load. Guardrails, where specified, shall be capable of withstanding a 200 lb

concentrated live load in any direction, and shall be designed in accordance with OSHA

guidelines. The tower shall be structurally capable of being supported at the four outer corners

of the tower cell. Alternatively, the tower manufacturer shall provide supporting steel to adapt

tower to be supported at four outer corners.

D. Casing and Frame:

1. Casing and Frame Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G235 (Z700)

coating.

2. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

3. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight.

4. Welded Connections: Continuous and watertight.

E. Cold water Collection Basin:

1. Material: Welded 301L Stainless steel

2. Removable stainless-steel strainer with openings smaller than nozzle orifices.

3. Overflow and drain connections.

4. Outlet Connection: ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange.

5. Removable equalization flume plate between adjacent cells of multiple-cell towers.

6. Equalizer connection for field-installed equalizer piping.

7. The basin floor shall slope toward the drain to allow complete flush out of debris and silt

that may accumulate.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 6

8. Basin Sweeper Distribution Piping and Nozzles:

a. Pipe Material: PVC.

b. Nozzle Material: Plastic.

c. Configure piping and nozzles to minimize sediment from collecting in the

collection basin.

F. Electric/Electronic, Collection Basin Water-Level Control System

1. Provide a water level control system including a NEMA 4X control panel, water level

probes and probe stilling chamber. The control system shall monitor the water level in the

cold-water basin to determine level events used for cold-water make-up, high and low

alarms or pump shut down. The control panel shall use electromechanical relays

providing power for the make-up solenoid and electrical contacts for alarm and pump

shutdown control circuits. Probes shall be contained in a vertical stilling chamber to

stabilize the water in the cold-water basin. Probes shall have replaceable stainless steel

tips and level height shall be field adjustable.

2. Provide one per each cooling tower cell.

G. Electric Basin Heater:

1. Stainless-Steel Electric Immersion Heaters: Installed in a threaded coupling on the side

of the collection basin.

2. Heater Control Panel: Mounted on the side of each cooling tower cell.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4

4. Magnetic contactors controlled by a temperature sensor/controller to maintain collection

basin water-temperature set point. Water-level probe shall monitor cooling tower water

level and de-energize the heater when the water reaches low-level set point.

5. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.

6. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram.

7. Electric Basin Heater shall be internally factory powered to Cooling Tower control Panel

(Single-point connection)

H. Gravity Water Distribution Basin: Non-pressurized design with head of water level in basin

adequate to overcome spray nozzle losses and designed to evenly distribute water over fill

throughout the flow range indicated.

1. Material: 301 L Stainless steel.

2. Location: Over each bank of fill with easily replaceable plastic spray nozzles mounted in

bottom of basin.

3. Inlet Connection: ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange.

4. Joints and Seams: Sealed watertight.

5. Partitioning Dams: Same material as basin to distribute water over the fill to minimize

icing while operating throughout the flow range indicated.

6. Removable Panels: Same material as basin to completely cover top of basin. Secure

panels to basin with removable stainless-steel hardware.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 7

7. Valves: Manufacturer's standard valve installed at each inlet connection and arranged to

balance or shut off flow to each gravity distribution basin.

8. Single-Inlet, Field Pipe Connection: Galvanized-steel pipe arranged to provide balancing

of flow within cooling tower cell without the need for additional balancing valves. Pipe

each cooling tower cell internally to a single, field connection suitable for mating to

ASME B16.5, Class 150 flange and located on the bottom unless otherwise indicated.

I. Fill:

1. Materials: PVC, with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. Minimum Thickness: 15 mils (0.4 mm), before forming.

3. Fabrication: Fill-type sheets, fabricated, formed, and bonded together after forming into

removable assemblies that are factory installed by manufacturer.

4. Fill Material Operating Temperature: Suitable for entering-water temperatures up

through 120 deg F (49 deg C)

J. Drift Eliminator:

1. Material: PVC; with maximum flame-spread index of 5 according to ASTM E 84.

2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.

3. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to achieve less

than 0.005% of design GPM flow rate.

K. Air-Intake Louvers:

1. Material: Matching casing.

2. Louver Blades: Arranged to uniformly direct air into cooling tower, to minimize air

resistance, and to prevent water from splashing out of tower during all modes of

operation including operation with fans off.

3. Location: Integral to fill.

L. Propeller Fan: Balanced at the factory after assembly.

1. Blade Material: Corrosion and fire resistant marine grade Aluminum

2. Hub Material: Aluminum.

3. Blades: Blades shall be resiliently mounted to fan hub and individually adjustable. Fan

blades shall be open cavity with suitable drainage to avoid accumulation of moisture.

Foam filled blades are not allowed due to potential moisture contamination of the foam

core causing an imbalance of the fan leading to vibration issues.

4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, galvanized-steel, wire-mesh screens complying with

OSHA regulations.

5. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning ball or roller bearings with moisture-proof seals and

premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures between minus 20 and plus

300 deg F (minus 29 and plus 149 deg C).

6. Maximum fan tip speed shall be 10,000 ft/min.

7. Gear drive: Fan(s) shall be driven through a right angle, industrial duty, oil lubricated,

geared speed reducer that requires no oil changes for the first five (5) years of operation.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 8

The gearbox bearings shall be rated at an L10A service life of 100,000 hours or greater.

The gear sets to have AGMA Quality Class of 9 or greater.

8. An external oil level dipstick shall be located adjacent to the motor at the fan deck

surface and shall be accessible from a portable maintenance ladder.

M. Fan Motor:

1. General Requirements for Fan Motors: Comply with NEMA designation and

temperature-rating requirements specified in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230513 -

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT and not indicated

below.

2. Motor Enclosure: Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) with epoxy or polyurethane

finish.

3. Energy Efficiency: NEMA Premium Efficient.

4. Service Factor: 1.15.

5. Insulation: Class F.

6. Single Speed Motor: Variable torque, Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section IV,

"Performance Standard Applying to All Machines," Part 31, "Definite-Purpose, Inverter-

Fed, Polyphase Motors."

7. The motor to gearbox close coupling shall be a tire-type, single piece, flexible element

design to accommodate frequent speed changes that are inherent with VFD applications.

8. The complete mechanical equipment assembly for each cell shall be supported by two

horizontal steel beams that resist misalignment between the motor and the gear

reducer/belt drive system.

N. Variable Speed Drive (VFD)

1. A complete UL listed Variable Speed Drive system in a Stainless Steel NEMA 3R

outdoor enclosure shall be provided.

2. The VFD shall use PWM technology with IGBT switching. VFD output switching signal

shall be programmed to not cause mechanical vibration issues with backlash in gearbox

teeth or vibration issues associated with long drive shafts.

3. The VFD shall be programmed for variable torque applications and shall catch a fan

spinning in the forward or reverse direction without tripping.

4. VFD panel construction shall include a main disconnect with short circuit and thermal

overload protection with external operating handle, lockable in the off position for lock-

out tag-out safety procedures.

5. A service switch directly ahead of the VFD shall be provided for voltage isolation during

VFD maintenance.

6. An integrated full voltage non-reversing bypass starter shall be furnished allowing fan

motor operation if VFD has failed.

7. The VFD system shall receive a speed reference signal from the building management

system monitoring the tower cold-water temperature. As an option to receiving the speed

reference signal from a building management system, the drive must have the capability

to receive a 4-20 mA temperature signal from an RTD transmitter.

8. The VFD shall have an internal PI regulator to modulate fan speed maintaining set point

temperature. The drive’s panel shall display the set-point temperature and cold-water



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 9

temperature on two separate lines. The bypass shall include a complete magnetic bypass

circuit with the capability to isolate the VFD when in the bypass mode. Transfer to the

bypass mode shall be manual in the event of VFD failure. Once the motor is transferred

to the bypass circuit the fan motor will run at constant full speed.

9. Operator controls shall be mounted on the front of the enclosure and shall consist of Start

and Stop control, Bypass/VFD selection, Auto/Manual selections and manual speed

control.

10. To prevent heating problems in the cooling tower fan motor the VFD system shall de-

energize the motor once 25% motor speed is reached and cooling is no longer required.

The cooling tower manufacturer shall offer VFD start-up assistance to assure proper VFD

programming for cooling tower operation.

O. Control Panel

1. Each cell of the cooling tower shall be equipped with a UL/CUL 508 listed SPPC (Single

Point Power Connection) control panel in a Stainless Steel NEMA 3R or 4X outdoor

enclosure.

2. The SPPC panel shall include a main circuit breaker with an external operating handle,

lockable in the off position for safety. The SPPC main circuit breaker will feed various

control circuits integrated into the SPPC panel including but not limited to: Fan motor

starter, basin heater controls and water level controls.

3. Provide operational status contacts wired to user terminal points.

4. The cooling tower manufacturer shall provide factory wired control panels to the outer

casing side of the cooling tower. The control panels shall be located above and/or to the

right side of the access door and shall be flush mounted on the cooling tower for shipping

widths 10’ (3m) and wider to avoid additional freight costs and permitting fees.

P. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive.

1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

2. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field-adjustable, acceleration-sensitivity set point in a

range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per minute. Cooling tower

manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for proper operation and protection.

3. Provide switch with manual-reset button for field connection to a BMS and hardwired

connection to VFD.

4. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, signal an alarm through the BMS and shut

down the fan.

Q. Controls: Comply with requirements in DIVISION 23, SECTION 230900 -

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC."

R. Personnel Access Components:

1. Doors: Large enough for personnel to access cooling tower internal components from

both cooling tower end walls. Doors shall be operable from both sides of the door.

2. External Ladders with Safety Cages: Aluminum, galvanized- or stainless-steel, fixed

ladders with ladder extensions to access external platforms and top of cooling tower from

adjacent grade without the need for portable ladders. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.27.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 10

3. External Platforms with Handrails: Aluminum, or galvanized-steel bar grating at cooling

tower access doors when cooling towers are elevated and not accessible from grade.

4. Handrail: Aluminum, galvanized steel, or stainless steel complete with kneerail and

toeboard, around top of cooling tower. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23.

5. Fan Access Platforms: Provide an internal galvanized steel fan access platform and ladder

to perform routine maintenance on cooling tower fan.

6. Provide Exterior Access Platform as shown on Central Utility Plant Roof Plan drawing.

7. Internal Platforms: Aluminum, bar grating.

a. Spanning the collection basin from one end of cooling tower to the other and

positioned to form a path between the access doors. Platform shall be elevated so

that all parts are above the high water level of the collection basin.

b. Elevated internal platforms with handrails accessible from fixed vertical ladders to

access the fan drive assembly when out of reach from collection basin platform.


A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according to

CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal

Performance."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support, anchor-bolt sizes and

locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other

conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and operation.

1. Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cooling towers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install cooling towers level and plumb, and fasten to supporting structure with proper seismic

restraints.

C. Maintain recommended clearances for service and maintenance.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 11

D. Install cooling towers and their support structures to withstand the effects of wind loads and

seismic events according to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by cooling tower manufacturer that are

not factory mounted.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other DIVISION 23 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on vibration

isolators.

D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low points in piping.

E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage system.

F. Domestic Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in DIVISION 22, SECTION

221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING.

G. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in DIVISION 23, SECTION

232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING.

H. Equalizer Piping: Piping requirements to match supply and return piping. Connect an equalizer

pipe, full size of cooling tower connection, between tower cells. Connect to cooling tower with

shutoff valve.






B. Tests and Inspections: Comply with CTI ATC 105, "Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling

Towers."

C. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 12

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE


B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical

connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions

and perform the following:

a. Clean entire unit including basins.

b. Verify that accessories are properly installed.

c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing.

d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.

e. Lubricate bearings.

f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and correct

problems.

g. Verify proper oil level in gear-drive housing. Fill with oil to proper level.

h. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check for harmonic

vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds resulting in abnormal

vibration.

i. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation.

j. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check makeup

water-level control and valve.

k. Verify operation of basin heater and control.

l. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower or HVAC

air intakes. Recommend corrective action.

m. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.

D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written starting

procedures.

E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.

B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.



TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 13

3.7 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers. Refer to DIVISION 01, SECTION 017900 -

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING.




TRO No. 2017021

COOLING TOWERS

236500 - 14

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

260100 - 1

SECTION 260100


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section includes basic general requirements for electrical installations.

1. Codes and Standards.

2. Submittals.

3. Coordination drawings.

4. Record documents.

5. Maintenance manuals.

6. Rough-ins.

7. Electrical installations.

8. Electrical demolition.

9. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

10. Access panels.

11. Touchup painting.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Section 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND

CABLES

2. Section 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

3. Section 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

4. Section 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

5. Section 260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS

AND CABLING

6. Section 260548.16 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL

SYSTEMS

7. Section 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

8. Section 260572 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

9. Section 260573 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

10. Section 262313 PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

11. Section 262413 SWITCHBOARDS

12. Section 262416 PANELBOARDS

13. Section 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES



TRO No. 2017021


260100 - 2

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Electrical work shall comply with the current editions of the following codes:

1. BOCA - National Building Code

2. IBC - International Building Code

3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code

4. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code

5. NFPA 99 - Health Care Facilities

6. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code

7. NFPA 110 – Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems

8. ANSI C2 - National Electrical Safety Code

B. Electrical work shall comply with the current standards of the following organizations:

1. The Facility Guidelines Institute (FGI) with assistance from theU.S. Department of

Health and Human Services - Guidelines for Construction and Equipment of Hospital and

Medical Facilities

2. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act

3. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

4. IES - Illuminating Engineering Society

5. EIA/TIA - Electronic Industries Association/Telecommunications Industry Association

a. EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building Wiring Standard.

b. EIA/TIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways

and Spaces.

6. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act

7. FM - Factory Mutual Association

8. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories

9. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

10. NEMA - National Electric Manufacturers Association

11. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials

C. In addition to complying with the specified requirements, comply with pertinent regulations of

governmental agencies and authorities having jurisdiction including local and state building,

plumbing, mechanical, electrical, fire, and health department codes and standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings shall be submitted in groups by systems.

B. Refer to the applicable Division 26 section for specific submittal requirements. Where there are

no specific submittal requirements in the specification section, provide manufacturer's standard

literature showing the submittal items.



TRO No. 2017021


260100 - 3

C. Increase, by the quantity listed below, the number of electrical related shop drawings, product

data, and samples submitted, to allow for required distribution plus two copies of each submittal

required, which will be retained by the Electrical Consulting Engineer.

1. Shop Drawings - Initial Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints.

2. Shop Drawings - Final Submittal: 1 additional blue- or black-line prints.

3. Product Data: 1 additional copy of each item.

4. Samples: 1 additional set.

D. Additional copies may be required by individual sections of these Specifications.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare Coordination Drawings to a 1/4-inch-equals-1-foot (1:50) scale or larger. Detail major

elements, components, and systems of electrical equipment and materials in relation to each

other and to other systems, installations, and building components. Indicate locations and space

requirements for installation, access, and working clearance. Show where sequence and

coordination of installations are important to the efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate

drawing preparation with effort specified in other Specification Sections. Include the following:

1. Provisions for scheduling, sequencing, moving, and positioning large equipment in the

building during construction.

2. Floor plans, elevations, and details, including the following:

a. Clearances to meet safety requirements and for servicing and maintaining

equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic

maintenance.

b. Equipment support details.

c. Exterior wall, roof, and foundation penetrations of cable and raceway; and their

relation to other penetrations and installations.

d. Fire-rated interior wall and floor penetrations by electrical installations.

e. Sizes and locations of required concrete pads and bases.

1.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents. Indicate installed conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of

control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker

size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building

lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials

installed.



TRO No. 2017021


260100 - 4

1.7 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals. Include the following information for equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance

curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers

of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and

normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency

instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;

disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

B. The minimum information that shall be furnished in the maintenance manual shall include the

following:

1. Individual characteristics for trouble shooting sequences for each item of each:

a. Distribution panel.

b. Switchboard.

2. Catalog cut sheets for every item for which a shop drawing is required.

3. Schedule of loads served from each:

a. Automatic transfer switch.

b. Branch circuit panel.

c. Distribution panel.

d. Generator set.

e. Switchboard.

4. On-hand spare parts list and complete parts list for each:

a. Distribution panel.

b. Switchboard.

5. Bolt tightening torques and inspection intervals on each:

a. Bolted bus connection.

b. Cable connection.

c. Miscellaneous bolted electrical connections.

6. Manufacturers' recommended cleaning intervals and special procedures for each:

a. Electrical equipment interior.

b. Electrical equipment ventilation opening.



TRO No. 2017021


260100 - 5

7. Main and arcing contact adjustment and replacement for each:


b. Circuit breaker.

8. Calibration and exercise procedures and intervals for each:


b. Molded case breaker.

9. "As designed" and "as left" adjustable circuit breaker settings.

10. Testing interval and target values for ground fault protection circuit relays.

11. Testing and trouble shooting procedures unique to special systems.

12. Approved special construction details that differ from the details shown on Drawings.


A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,

compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOUCHUP PAINT

A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the

actual equipment to be connected.

3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical systems,

materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building

components.



TRO No. 2017021


260100 - 6

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of

construction, to allow for electrical installations.

4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured-

in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for

efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring

positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and

equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised

service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each

service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,

including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements

indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown

only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual

system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to

other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement

of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of

disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces.

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required

to be installed at a specified slope.

13. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate

installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

14. Where electrical identification markings and devices will be concealed by acoustical

ceilings and similar finishes, coordinate installation of these items before ceiling

installation.

15. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by

finished surfaces.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or

disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal

capacity, quality, and functionality.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be

demolished, in their entirety.



TRO No. 2017021


260100 - 7

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in

place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch

surface to match existing finish.

D. Remove demolished material from Project site.

E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for

relocation.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to

permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed

surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and

refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

3.5 ACCESS PANELS

A. Furnish access panels for installation by and in accordance with other sections to allow access

to electrical equipment and devices installed under Divisions 26. Furnish access panels for

electrical devices installed behind permanent construction such as gypsum wall board partitions

and ceiling or concrete masonry walls and partitions.

3.6 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint.

1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to

suit the degree of damage at each location.

2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing

and application of successive coats.

3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by

manufacturer.


A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:

1. Raceways.



TRO No. 2017021


260100 - 8

2. Building wire and connectors.

3. Supporting devices for electrical components.

4. Electrical identification.

5. Concrete bases.

6. Electrical demolition.

7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

8. Touchup painting.

3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.

Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,

and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.




TRO No. 2017021

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

260519 - 1

SECTION 260519


PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Copper building wire rated 600 V or less.

2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances.

B. VFC: Variable frequency controller.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.



TRO No. 2017021


260519 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE

A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with

an overall insulation layer or jacket, or both, rated 600 V or less.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Alpha Wire Company.

2. Belden Inc.

3. Cerro Wire LLC.

4. Encore Wire Corporation.

5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.

6. Okonite Company (The).

7. Southwire Company.

8. WESCO.

C. Standards:

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for

intended location and use.

2. RoHS compliant.

3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable marking according to UL's

"Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide."

D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with ASTM B 8

or ASTM B 496 for stranded conductors.

E. Conductor Insulation:

1. Type NM: Comply with UL 83 and UL 719.

2. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277.

3. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply with UL 83.

F. Shield:

1. Type TC-ER: Cable designed for use with VFCs, with oversized crosslinked polyethylene

insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85 percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-

size ground wire, and sunlight- and oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123457076824










TRO No. 2017021


260519 - 3

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors, splices, and lugs of size, ampacity rating, material,

type, and class for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,

by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. 3M Electrical Products.

2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International.

3. Gardner Bender.

4. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.

5. Ideal Industries, Inc.

6. ILSCO.

7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation.

8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.

C. Lugs: One piece, seamless, designed to terminate conductors specified in this Section.

1. Material: Copper.

2. Type: One hole with standard barrels.

3. Termination: Compression.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

C. VFC Output Circuits Cable: Extra-flexible stranded for all sizes.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND

WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2/THWN-2,

single conductors in raceway.











TRO No. 2017021


260519 - 4

C. Emergency Power Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

D. Normal Power Branch Circuits: Type THHN-2/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2/THWN-2, single conductors

in raceway.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2/THWN-2, single

conductors in raceway.

G. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-

steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

H. VFC Output Circuits: Type TC-ER cable with braided shield.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to

Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors

and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used

must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended

maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

1. Wire-pulling compounds that increase the dielectric constant shall not be used on the

isolated power system secondary conductors or branch circuits.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will

not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and

follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-

tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in

UL 486A and UL 486B.



TRO No. 2017021


260519 - 5

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification

for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of

conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with

requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and

Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore

original fire-resistance rating of assembly.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare

test reports.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,

test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each of the following visual and electrical tests:

a. Inspect exposed sections of conductor and cable for physical damage and correct

connection according to the single-line diagram.

b. Test bolted connections for high resistance using one of the following:

1) A low-resistance ohmmeter.

2) Calibrated torque wrench.

3) Thermographic survey.

c. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.



TRO No. 2017021


260519 - 6

d. Inspect for correct identification.

e. Inspect cable jacket and condition.

f. Insulation-resistance test on each conductor for ground and adjacent conductors.

Apply a potential of 500-V dc for 300-V rated cable and 1000-V dc for 600-V rated

cable for a one-minute duration.

g. Continuity test on each conductor and cable.

h. Uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

3. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but before Final Acceptance,

perform an infrared scan of each splice in conductors No. 3 AWG and larger. Remove box

and equipment covers so splices are accessible to portable scanner. Correct deficiencies

determined during the scan.

a. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

b. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches

checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies

detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports to record the following:

1. Procedures used.

2. Results that comply with requirements.

3. Results that do not comply with requirements, and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




TRO No. 2017021

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260526 - 1

SECTION 260526


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding and bonding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.




1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site

testing.



C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

D. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.



TRO No. 2017021


260526 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


following:

1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.

2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.

3. ERICO International Corporation.

4. Fushi Copperweld Inc.

5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.

6. Harger Lightning and Grounding.

7. ILSCO.

8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.

9. Robbins Lightning, Inc.

10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.

11. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

2.3 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by

applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

C. Bare Copper Conductors:

1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.

2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in

diameter.

5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.

6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.














TRO No. 2017021


260526 - 3

7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper

ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

D. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100

mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart.

Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V.

Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in

which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items

connected.

B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for

materials being joined and installation conditions.

C. Bus-Bar Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy, with two wire terminals.

D. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions, with dual,

tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts.

E. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy.

F. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub.

G. Ground Rod Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal with hex head bolt.

H. Lay-in Lug Connector: Mechanical type, copper rated for direct burial terminal with set screw.

I. Service Post Connectors: Mechanical type, bronze alloy terminal, in short- and long-stud

lengths, capable of single and double conductor connections.

J. Signal Reference Grid Clamp: Mechanical type, stamped-steel terminal with hex head screw.

K. Straps: Solid copper, copper lugs. Rated for 600 A.

L. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial.

M. Water Pipe Clamps:

1. Mechanical type, two pieces with stainless-steel bolts.

a. Material: Die-cast zinc alloy.

b. Listed for direct burial.



TRO No. 2017021


260526 - 4

2. U-bolt type with malleable-iron clamp and copper ground connector rated for direct

burial.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for

No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service

equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Install bus on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150

mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.

2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated.

3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those

required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits.

2. Lighting circuits.

3. Receptacle circuits.

4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

6. Flexible raceway runs.

7. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.

8. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from

grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment

grounding bar terminal on busway.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-

mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,



TRO No. 2017021


260526 - 5

dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to

air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated

equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond

conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise

indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may

be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance

except where routed through short lengths of conduit.

1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate

any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install

bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection

is required, use a bolted clamp.

C. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,

from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service

entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;

use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of

the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect

grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or

sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water

meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment

shutoff valve.

D. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of

associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond

across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

E. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner

column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart.



TRO No. 2017021


260526 - 6




1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted,

electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's


C. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


E. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.

2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.

3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.

4. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.

F. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Owner

promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




TRO No. 2017021

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260529 - 1

SECTION 260529


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduit and cable support devices.

2. Support for conductors in vertical conduit.

3. Structural steel for fabricated supports and restraints.

4. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components, including powder-actuated fasteners,

mechanical expansion anchors, concrete inserts, clamps, through bolts, toggle bolts, and

hanger rods.

5. Fabricated metal equipment support assemblies.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for products and

installation requirements necessary for compliance with seismic criteria.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for the following:

a. Clamps.

b. Hangers.

c. Sockets.

d. Eye nuts.

e. Fasteners.

f. Anchors.

g. Saddles.

h. Brackets.



TRO No. 2017021


260529 - 2

2. Include rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation details for electrical hangers and support

systems.

1. Trapeze hangers. Include product data for components.


C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For hangers and supports for electrical equipment and

systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.









A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions

determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the supported equipment and systems will remain in place

without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

system will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.

3. Component Response Modification Factor: 6

4. Component Amplification Factor: 2.5

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.



TRO No. 2017021


260529 - 3

1. Flame Rating: Class 1.

2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635.

2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed

for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

B. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded

body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for nonarmored electrical conductors or cables in

riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as

required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be made of malleable

iron.

C. Support for Rooftop Conduits: Rooftop conduit supports shall be specifically designed for

installation without the need for roof penetrations or flashings, or otherwise causing damage to

the roofing membrane. All steel hardware shall be galvanized or zinc-coated.

D. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M steel plates, shapes,

and bars; black and galvanized.

E. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or

their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs are not permitted.

2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened

portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for

supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) B-line, an Eaton business.

2) Hilti, Inc.

3) ITW Ramset/Red Head; Illinois Tool Works, Inc.

4) MKT Fastening, LLC.

3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units are similar to MSS

Type 18 units and comply with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58 units are suitable for

attached structural element.

5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=1746







TRO No. 2017021


260529 - 4

2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions

of supported equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical

equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26 Section "Raceways

and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for

EMT and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than

stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.

3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this

Article.

B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength

will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits.

Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported

components plus 200 lb (90 kg).

C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten

electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods

unless otherwise indicated by code:

1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units.

4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

6. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.

7. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,

transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.



TRO No. 2017021


260529 - 5

D. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid the need for

reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation

to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

3.4 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in

both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters

from edge of the base.

B. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete.

C. Anchor equipment to concrete base as follows:

1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting

drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be

embedded.


3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately

after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply

with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05

mm).

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply

galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




TRO No. 2017021


260529 - 6

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260533 - 1

SECTION 260533


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.

3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and

attachment details.

C. Coordination Drawings: Conduit routing plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items

are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of items involved:

1. Structural members in paths of conduit groups with common supports.

2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in paths of conduit groups with

common supports.

D. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosures, cabinets, and conduit racks and their

mounting provisions, including those for internal components, from manufacturer.



TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 2







4. Detailed description of conduit support devices and interconnections on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS


following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Allied Tube & Conduit.

3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

4. Electri-Flex Company.

5. O-Z/Gedney.

6. Picoma Industries.

7. Republic Conduit.

8. Southwire Company.

9. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

10. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.

11. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.

D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.

E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.

F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456895813&mf=&src=wd













TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 3

H. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing

agency, and marked for intended location and application. Listed and labeled for type of

conduit, location, and use. Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.

1. Fittings for EMT:

a. Material: Steel or die cast.

b. Type: Setscrew or compression.

2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated

for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding

jumper.

I. Joint Compound for GRC or IMC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having

jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect

threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING


following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.

3. Arnco Corporation.

4. CANTEX Inc.

5. CertainTeed Corporation.

6. Condux International, Inc.

7. Electri-Flex Company.

8. Kraloy.

9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.

11. RACO; Hubbell.


B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and

application.

C. Fiberglass:

1. Comply with NEMA TC 14.

2. Comply with UL 2515 for aboveground raceways.

3. Comply with UL 2420 for belowground raceways.

D. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.















TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 4

E. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise

indicated.

F. LFNC: UL 1660.

G. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and

material.

H. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.

2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS


following:

1. Adalet.

2. EGS/Appleton Electric.

3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.

4. FSR Inc.

5. Hoffman.

6. Hubbell Incorporated.

7. Kraloy.

8. Milbank Manufacturing Co.

9. Mono-Systems, Inc.

10. O-Z/Gedney.

11. RACO; Hubbell.

12. Robroy Industries.

13. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.

14. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.


16. Wiremold / Legrand.

B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets

installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.

C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.

D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with

gasketed cover.

E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.

F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

G. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773,

galvanized, cast iron with gasketed cover.



















TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 5

H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm

deep).

I. Gangable boxes are allowed.

J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge

cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.

3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.

K. Cabinets:

1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable

front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.

3. Key latch to match panelboards.

4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

5. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

6. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified

testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed Conduit: GRC.

2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC.

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

4. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:

1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT.

2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.

3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC. Raceway locations include the

following:

a. Loading dock.

b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.

c. Mechanical rooms from floor to eight feet above floor.



TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 6

d. Gymnasiums.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet

locations.

5. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC.

6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless

steel in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch (16-mm) trade size.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless

otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

2. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.

3. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with

NEMA FB 2.20.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.

F. Install surface raceways only where indicated on Drawings.

G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F (49 deg C).

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements

on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of

raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-

water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for

control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300

mm) of changes in direction.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.



TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 7

H. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm)of enclosures to which attached.

I. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply

listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound

manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings

to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

K. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install

locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.

L. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in

the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.

M. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use

roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length.

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not

less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end

of pull wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways in

use.

O. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with

listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a

blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway

sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.

P. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or

boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all

raceways at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated

spaces.

2. Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure.

3. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Q. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.

R. Expansion-Joint Fittings:

1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature

change may exceed 30 deg F (17 deg C) and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25

feet (7.6 m). Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located

where environmental temperature change may exceed 100 deg F (55 deg C) and that has

straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet (30 m).



TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 8

2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each

of the following locations:

a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F (70 deg C)

temperature change.

b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F (86 deg C) temperature

change.

c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125

deg F (70 deg C) temperature change.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot

of length of straight run per deg F (0.06 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C)

of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and

contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F

(0.0115 mm per meter of length of straight run per deg C) of temperature change for

metal conduits.

4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure

expansion joints.

5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected

according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time

of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.

S. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches

(1830 mm) of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or

movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

T. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not

individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured

to center of box unless otherwise indicated.

U. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,

and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a

raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.

V. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same

vertical channel.

W. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.

X. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing

members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.

Y. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by

conduits.



TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 9

3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply

with requirements in Division 26 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways

and Cabling."

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.




TRO No. 2017021


260533 - 10

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING

260544 - 1

SECTION 260544


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.

2. Sleeve-seal systems.

3. Sleeve-seal fittings.

4. Grout.

5. Silicone sealants.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Wall Sleeves:

1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,

plain ends.

2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure

pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel

sheet; 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal

joint, with tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.

C. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.



TRO No. 2017021


260544 - 2

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: With nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. Molded-PE or -PP Sleeves: Removable, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with

nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:

1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.

2. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches (1270 mm) and

with no side larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.052 inch (1.3

mm).

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches (1270 mm) or more and one

or more sides larger than 16 inches (400 mm), thickness shall be 0.138 inch (3.5

mm).

2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between

sleeve and raceway or cable.


following:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.

b. CALPICO, Inc.

c. Metraflex Company (The).

d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

e. Proco Products, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include

type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.

4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS

A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in

concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to

match piping OD.


following:



TRO No. 2017021


260544 - 3

a. HOLDRITE.

b. Presealed Systems.

2.4 GROUT

A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-fire-

rated walls or floors.

B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS

A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of

grade indicated below.

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal

surfaces that are not fire rated.

B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand

and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.

C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit

Floors and Walls:

1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:

a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.




TRO No. 2017021


260544 - 4

b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly

between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;

protect material while curing.

2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space between sleeve and

raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.

4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are

used. Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush

with both surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.

D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:

1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved

opening.

2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board

assemblies.

E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible

boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and

mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space

between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves

to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for

installing sleeve-seal system.

3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway

entries into building.

B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or

cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical

sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts

against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.

B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and

walls. Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.



TRO No. 2017021


260544 - 5

C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.

D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.




TRO No. 2017021


260544 - 6

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260548.16 - 1

SECTION 260548.16


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Restraint channel bracings.

2. Restraint cables.

3. Seismic-restraint accessories.

4. Mechanical anchor bolts.

5. Adhesive anchor bolts.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 26 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for commonly used electrical

supports and installation requirements.



1. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each

type and size of seismic-restraint component used.


A. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for electrical components with

other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

B. Welding certificates.




TRO No. 2017021


260548.16 - 2


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are

more stringent.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,

"Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis. They shall

bear anchorage preapproval from OSHPD in addition to preapproval, showing maximum

seismic-restraint ratings, by ICC-ES or another agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations.

If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred.

Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) that support seismic-restraint designs

must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 120 mph (Ultimate).

2. Building Classification Category: IV.

3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. (48.8 kg/sq. m) multiplied by maximum area of HVAC component

projected on vertical plane normal to wind direction and 45 degrees either side of normal.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D.

2. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.201g.

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1.0-Second Period: 0.093g.

2.2 RESTRAINT CHANNEL BRACINGS


following:

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a Division of Cooper Industries.

2. Hilti, Inc.





TRO No. 2017021


260548.16 - 3

3. Mason Industries, Inc.

4. Unistrut; Atkore International.

B. Description: MFMA-4, shop- or field-fabricated bracing assembly made of slotted steel

channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building

structure at the other end, with other matching components, and with corrosion-resistant

coating; rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

2.3 RESTRAINT CABLES


following:


2. Hilti, Inc.



B. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized-steel cables. End connections made of steel

assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service;

with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

2.4 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT ACCESSORIES


following:


2. Hilti, Inc.



B. Hanger-Rod Stiffener: Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

C. Hinged and Swivel Brace Attachments: Multifunctional steel connectors for attaching hangers

to rigid channel bracings and restraint cables.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid

equipment mountings and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene

elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings and matched to type and size

of attachment devices used.













TRO No. 2017021


260548.16 - 4

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant

neoprene, with a flat washer face.

2.5 MECHANICAL ANCHOR BOLTS


following:


2. Hilti, Inc.



B. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel

for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with

strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.6 ADHESIVE ANCHOR BOLTS


following:


2. Hilti, Inc.



B. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing PVC or urethane

methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive.

Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless

steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as

tested according to ASTM E 488.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive seismic-control devices for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations

before installation.











TRO No. 2017021


260548.16 - 5


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps

approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger-Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger-rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings

to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods caused by seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of

components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads

within specified loading limits.

3.3 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate the location of embedded connection hardware with supported equipment

attachment and mounting points and with requirements for concrete reinforcement and

formwork.

B. Equipment and Hanger Restraints:

1. Install resilient, bolt-isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance

between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

2. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service

member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide

resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

E. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at

flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

F. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for

anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling.

Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are

encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and

telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved

full design strength.



TRO No. 2017021


260548.16 - 6

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty

sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to

which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to

installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole

and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air

pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque using a torque wrench.

6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in runs of raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways

where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different

structural elements, and where connection is terminated to equipment that is anchored to a

different structural element from the one supporting them as they approach equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

END OF SECTION 260548.16



TRO No. 2017021

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

260553 - 1

SECTION 260553


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways.

2. Identification of power and control cables.

3. Identification for conductors.

4. Warning labels and signs.

5. Instruction signs.

6. Equipment identification labels.

7. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for electrical identification products.

B. Identification Schedule: For each piece of electrical equipment and electrical system

components to be an index of nomenclature for electrical equipment and system components

used in identification signs and labels. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For arc-flash hazard study.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with ASME A13.1.



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 2

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks

used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature

changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material

surfaces.

2.2 COLOR AND LEGEND REQUIREMENTS

A. Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.

2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

B. Color-Coding for Phase- and Voltage-Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed

below for ungrounded service feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

1. Color shall be factory applied or field applied for sizes larger than No. 8 AWG if

authorities having jurisdiction permit.

2. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

c. Phase C: Blue.

3. Colors for 240-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Black.

b. Phase B: Red.

4. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:

a. Phase A: Brown.

b. Phase B: Orange.

c. Phase C: Yellow.

5. Color for Neutral: White or gray.

6. Color for Equipment Grounds: Green.



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 3

7. Colors for Isolated Grounds: Green with white stripe.

C. Warning labels and signs shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN

FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES

(915 MM)."

D. Equipment Identification Labels:

1. Black letters on a white field.

2.3 LABELS

A. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible labels

laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear

adhesive tape for securing label ends.

B. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways and Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit,

pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeves, with diameters sized to suit

diameters of raceways they identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.

C. Self-Adhesive Labels:

1. Preprinted or write-on, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, flexible label with acrylic pressure-

sensitive adhesive.

a. Self-Lamination: Clear; UV-, weather- and chemical-resistant; self-laminating,

protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable or raceway diameter,

such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.

2. Thermal, transfer-printed, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick, multicolor, weather- and UV-

resistant, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door,

or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

a. Nominal Size: 3.5-by-5-inch (76-by-127-mm).

3. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 4

2.4 BANDS AND TUBES:

A. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-

colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameters sized to suit diameters of

raceways or cables they identify, and that stay in place by gripping action.

B. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tubes with machine-printed

identification labels, sized to suit diameters of and shrunk to fit firmly around cables they

identify. Full shrink recovery occurs at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL

224.

2.5 TAPES AND STENCILS:

A. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification

legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; not less than 3 mils

(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use.

C. Tape and Stencil for Raceways Carrying Circuits 600 V or Less: 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide black

stripes on 10-inch (250-mm) centers placed diagonally over orange background that extends full

length of raceway or duct and is 12 inches (300 mm) wide. Stop stripes at legends.

D. Floor Marking Tape: 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape,

with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.6 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch (50 by 50 by 1.3 mm), with stamped

legend, punched for use with self-locking cable tie fastener.

B. Nonmetallic Preprinted Tags: Polyethylene tags, 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, color-coded for

phase and voltage level, with factory printed permanent designations; punched for use with self-

locking cable tie fastener.

C. Write-On Tags:

1. Polyester Tags: 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet and cable

tie for attachment to raceway, conductor, or cable.

2. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag

manufacturer.



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 5

2.7 SIGNS

A. Baked-Enamel Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size

required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).

B. Metal-Backed Butyrate Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs, with 0.0396-

inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing and with colors, legend, and size required for

application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

3. Nominal Size: 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

C. Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Plastic Signs:

1. Engraved legend.

2. Thickness:

a. For signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm), minimum 1/16-inch- (1.6-mm-).

b. For signs larger than 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm), 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.

c. Engraved legend with white letters on a dark grey background.

d. Self-adhesive.

e. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.8 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6

nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch (5 mm).

2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F (23 deg C) according to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi (82.7

MPa).

3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C).

4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application

requirements. Retain paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or

interior).



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 6

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine

screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Before applying electrical identification products, clean

substrates of substances that could impair bond, using materials and methods recommended by

manufacturer of identification product.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Verify and coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings,

manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and operation and maintenance manual. Use consistent

designations throughout Project.

B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

C. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

D. Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without

interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Install access doors or panels to

provide view of identifying devices.

E. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

F. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners

appropriate to the location and substrate.

G. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:

1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.

2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation

and paint application.

I. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or

cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

J. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band

shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 7

contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at

50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals

in congested areas.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch

Circuits, More Than 30 A and 120 V to Ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl tape applied

in bands. Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull

box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels containing the wiring system

legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. "EMERGENCY POWER."

2. "POWER."

3. "UPS."

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and

junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Locate identification at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-

foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum

intervals in congested areas.

D. Install instructional sign, including the color code for grounded and ungrounded conductors

using adhesive-film-type labels.

E. Conductors To Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control,

and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and

pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker-tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used

by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and

operation and maintenance manual.

G. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of

access to live parts. Workspace shall comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless

otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in

finished spaces.



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 8

H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-

adhesive warning labels.

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.

3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.

4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Power-transfer switches.

b. Controls with external control power connections.

I. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and

maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with

approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

J. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red

background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at

equipment used for power transfer.

K. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label

that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and operation and maintenance manual.

Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control

panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,

lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm unless equipment is provided

with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a

single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-)

high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for

viewing from the floor.

d. Unless labels are provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten them

with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL

rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment To Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by

panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be in the form of a self-

adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.

c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

d. Switchgear.



TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 9

e. Switchboards.

f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the

transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

g. Substations.

h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.

i. Motor-control centers.

j. Enclosed switches.

k. Enclosed circuit breakers.

l. Enclosed controllers.

m. Variable-speed controllers.

n. Push-button stations.

o. Power-transfer equipment.

p. Contactors.

q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.

r. Battery-inverter units.

s. Battery racks.

t. Power-generating units.

u. Monitoring and control equipment.

v. UPS equipment.




TRO No. 2017021


260553 - 10

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

260572 - 1

SECTION 260572


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum interrupting

capacity of circuit protective devices.

B. The study shall be performed and submitted with the shop drawing submittal for the electrical

distribution equipment. Approval of submitted electrical equipment will not be provided until

approval of the coordination study is provided by the engineer. Upon completion of the installa-

tion, the study shall be revised and resubmitted with actual field conditions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the

course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used

therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes

the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to

the wiring system of the premises served.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective devices

submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.



TRO No. 2017021


260572 - 2

2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by a

qualified professional engineer.

a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the distribution

equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in

equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary

submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and

associated characteristics is satisfactory.

b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of

short-circuit study.

C. Qualification Data: For Field Adjusting Agency.

D. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.

Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this

Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Short-Circuit Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets

computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude

on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.

1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed professional

engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development

Professional certification.

C. Short-Circuit Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the

study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All

elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this

professional engineer.

D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member

company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing

laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the

following:




TRO No. 2017021


260572 - 3

1. ESA Inc.

2. Operation Technology, Inc.

3. Power Analytics, Corporation.

4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.

C. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the capability

to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and

guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.

2. Cable size and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.

4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.

5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings.

2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus calculated

short-circuit duties.

3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal to or

higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication

factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault currents;

verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors

at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to

or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: At a minimum shall include the following:

1. Generator data, present and future

2. Utility source impedance







TRO No. 2017021


260572 - 4

3. Motor nameplate data

4. Conductors (Cable sizes, lengths, number of conductors, and conductor material)

G. Short-Circuit Study Output:

1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the

following for each overcurrent device location:

a. Voltage.

b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle.

c. Fault-point X/R ratio.

d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the


a. Voltage.

b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.


d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio.

2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6.

3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the


a. Voltage.

b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle.


d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio.

e. Equivalent impedance.

f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis.

g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a total basis.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram. Call any discrepancies to

the attention of Architect.

2. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted under

the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.



TRO No. 2017021


260572 - 5

3. For relocated equipment that is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution

system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and

engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by

NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with

recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the

field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in

charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds

NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification.

1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent

protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent

with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals,

input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service.

3. Power sources and ties.

4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.

5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance.

6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List type of

breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated

kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and

conductor material.

9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

10. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or

nonmagnetic).

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY

A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at each service transformer and generator, extending down

to the system overcurrent protective devices as follows:

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less.

2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer rated

less than 125 kVA.



TRO No. 2017021


260572 - 6

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout

electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and

alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous

motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase

ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the

asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment.

1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for areas as

defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each

of the following:

1. Electric utility's supply termination point.

2. Incoming switchgear.

3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals.

4. Low-voltage switchgear.

5. Motor-control centers.

6. Control panels.

7. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.

8. Branch circuit panelboards.

9. Disconnect switches.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-

circuit study.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.




TRO No. 2017021

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

260573 - 1

SECTION 260573


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current and overcurrent protective device

coordination studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the protective device

coordination study.

B. The study shall be performed and submitted with the shop drawing submittal for the electrical

distribution equipment. Approval of submitted electrical equipment will not be provided until

approval of the coordination study is provided by the engineer. Upon completion of the installa-

tion, the study shall be revised and resubmitted with actual field conditions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not

otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the

course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used

therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes

the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to

the wiring system of the premises served.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.



TRO No. 2017021


260573 - 2

B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software

programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

C. Qualification Data: For coordination-study specialist.

D. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process for

system protective devices has been completed. Submittals shall be in digital form.

1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.

2. Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.

3. Coordination-Study Report.

4. Setting report.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"


a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study Report:

1) One-line diagram.

2) Protective device coordination study.

3) Time-current coordination curves.

b. Power system data.


A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.

Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this

Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.

B. Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the

study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All

elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this

professional engineer.

C. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and

capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member

company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing

laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction.

D. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.



TRO No. 2017021


260573 - 3

E. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide software by one of the

following:

1. ESA Inc.

2. Operation Technology, Inc.

3. Power Analytics, Corporation.

4. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

B. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the

capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in

IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-

characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device

settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective

coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots.

1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults.

b. Simultaneous faults.

c. Explicit negative sequence.

d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms and

guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following:

1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings.

2. Cable size and lengths.

3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1919&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd







TRO No. 2017021


260573 - 4

4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings.

5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: At a minimum shall include the following:

1. Generator data, present and future

2. Utility source impedance

3. Motor nameplate data

4. Conductors (Cable sizes, lengths, number of conductors, and conductor material)

E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in "Short-

Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective Device

Short-Circuit Study."

F. Protective Device Coordination Study:

1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the field. Use

manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent

protective devices when available.

a. Phase and Ground Relays:

1) Device tag.

2) Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and instantaneous pickup

value.

3) Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

b. Circuit Breakers:

1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time, ground).

2) Adjustable time-current characteristic.

3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup.

4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

c. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.

G. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to

achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation exists

between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices.

Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the

power source is local generation. Show the following information:

1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the system

covered.

2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or

asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.



TRO No. 2017021


260573 - 5

3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if

applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended.

4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device.

b. Medium-voltage equipment overcurrent relays.

c. Medium- and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total

clearing, tolerance, and damage bands.

d. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including manufacturer's

tolerance bands.

e. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI through-fault

protection curves.

f. Cables and conductors damage curves.

g. Ground-fault protective devices.

h. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points.

i. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point.

j. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and panelboard.

5. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective

operation is achieved.

6. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical

distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

Devices to be coordinated include all new electrical equipment installed on the project and

coordination with the existing electrical equipment one level upstream and/or downstream of

installed new equipment, as applicable.

1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been

assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved

prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied in the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call

discrepancies to the attention of Architect.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action

submittals and information submittals for this Project.



TRO No. 2017021


260573 - 6

3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical distribution

system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and

engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by

NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a

guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be

acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the

engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative

who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III

certification.

1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and involved

in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags

that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective

device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Impedance of utility service entrance: Utility company's fault-current contribution as

obtained from utility.

3. Power sources and ties.

4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground.

5. Full-load current of all loads.

6. Voltage level at each bus.

7. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,

showing the following:

a. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List

type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating,

and breaker settings.

b. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance,

rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

c. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer

ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

d. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift.

e. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance, Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.

f. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit material

(magnetic or nonmagnetic).

g. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction

and metallic shield performance parameters.

h. Maximum demands from service meters.

i. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths,

and conductor material.

j. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

8. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced with

tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:



TRO No. 2017021


260573 - 7

a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent starting

and stopping.

b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic inrush

current, and overload capability.

c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time, type of

start, and thermal-damage curve.

d. Generator thermal-damage curve.

e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective devices.

f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility

company.

g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.

h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical, ampere

or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range,

and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range,

instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for

overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting rating

in amperes rms symmetrical.

3.3 COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written

report. Comply with IEEE 399.

B. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:

1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized.

b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current, whichever is

specified for that transformer.

c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by

unusual loading or emergency conditions.

2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault

currents.

C. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.

D. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-

32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that

equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping

time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine

temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed

standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.



TRO No. 2017021


260573 - 8

E. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.

3.4 FIELD ADJUSTING

A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings provided by

the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division

of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-

circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who

holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III

certification.

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform

NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage the Coordination Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the

following:

1. Acquaint personnel in the fundamentals of operating the power system in normal and

emergency modes.

2. Hand-out and explain the objectives of the coordination study, study descriptions,

purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for

interpreting the time-current coordination curves.

3. Adjust, operate, and maintain overcurrent protective device settings.




TRO No. 2017021

PARALLELING LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR

262313 - 1

SECTION 262313


PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the modification of existing ASCO Generator Synchronizing low-voltage,

circuit-breaker switchgear and associated control systems, for paralleling generators on an

isolated bus and for distributing power in ac systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.

B. HMI: Human machine interface.

C. Legally Required: As used in this Section, it shall have the same meaning as used in NFPA 70.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type component to be added to the existing switchgear:

1. Include technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and

finishes for programmable logic controllers, instrumentation, control devices, monitoring

devices, Ethernet interface, and display components.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, factory settings,

and accessories for individual circuit breakers.

3. Include time-current characteristic curves for overcurrent protective devices.

4. Include description of sequence of operation for paralleling controls.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include tabulation of installed devices with features and ratings.

2. Include features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components.

3. Detail nameplate legends.



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 2

4. Include mimic-bus diagram.

5. Include three-line power wiring diagrams for paralleling low-voltage switchgear,

generators, and related equipment showing device terminal numbers.

6. Include point-to-point schematic control, monitoring, and alarm wiring diagrams showing

internal component terminal numbers.

7. Include point-to point schematic control, monitoring, and alarm wiring diagrams for

external components indicating terminal numbers for the following:

a. Transfer switches.

C. Sequence of Operation: Description of modified sequence of operation for paralleling controls

in automatic, manual, system test, and peak-shaving modes.

1. Include the following in the description of the automatic-mode sequence of operation:

a. Programmed sequence of initial generator starting and connection of generators to

the isolated paralleling bus, including a description of how the proposed design

complies with the requirements for redundancy.

b. Programmed sequence of transferring loads to the isolated paralleling bus based on

operator-adjustable preset priorities and preset loads. Include initial load settings.

c. Programmed sequence of starting and stopping generators based on actual real-

time measured loads.

d. Programmed sequence of sending a load-shed signal to transfer switches when the

generator frequency does not return to the normal frequency within the adjustable

time period.

e. Programmed sequence of stopping generators based on no transfer switch or other

device sending a start signal.

2. Include the following in the description of the system testing mode sequence of

operation:

a. Load.

b. No load.

3. Include in the description, the manual-mode sequence of operation showing that the

manual mode fulfills the requirement to permit the operator at the paralleling low-voltage

switchgear to accomplish all automatic, system test, and peak-shaving functions.

D. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Updated mimic bus diagram reflecting field changes after final switchgear load connections

have been made, for record.



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 3

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchgear and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Include the following:

a. Manufacturer's written instructions for sequence of operation.

b. Manufacturer's system checklists, maintenance schedule, and maintenance log

sheets complying with NFPA 110.

c. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting relays.

d. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent

protective device.




1. Control Power Fuses: Six of each type and rating used. Include spares for the following:

a. Potential transformers.

b. Control power circuits.

2. Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.




testing.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Store switchgear components indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent

condensation. Protect switchgear from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and

physical damage.



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 4

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written

permission.

B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation at indicated ampere

ratings for the following conditions:

1. Ambient temperature not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace new paralleling equipment

components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by



A. Seismic Performance: Paralleling low-voltage switchgear shall withstand the effects of

earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




B. Structural Performance: Paralleling low-voltage switchgear outdoor enclosures shall comply

with locally adopted codes for gravity and wind loads.



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 5

2.3 PARALLELING MONITOR AND CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Modify existing control system to include new circuit breaker and transfer switch as shown on

drawings.

B. Components and Devices: Factory mounted in a metal-enclosed, paralleling low-voltage

switchgear.

C. Modification of Human-Machine Interface Device:

1. Updated One-Line Diagram:

2. Updated Alarm Summary and Run Report Screen:

a. For each start signal, lists start time and date, stop time and date, maximum

kilowatt and ampere load on system during run time, and start and stop times of

individual engine generators.

b. Access to trend all monitored automatic transfer switches.

3. Updated Load Status and Control Screen: Displays status of automatic transfer switches

connected to the system.

a. Automatic transfer switch connected to normal.

b. Automatic transfer switch connected to emergency.

c. Engine start indication.

d. Load-shed indication.

e. Load-add indication.

f. Inhibit to emergency source.

g. Inhibit to normal source.

h. Transfer Switch Power Metering Function: Total kilowatt, three-phase current, and

three-phase voltage.

i. Automatic Transfer Switch Load Priority: Ability to change priorities of automatic

transfer switches (password protected).

j. Display name, status, and priority of each load block (whether on or off) and the

total load of that block.

k. Allow for manually adding or shedding loads.

4. Updated Status and Alarm Screen:

a. Status, Light Only:

1) Monitoring of Each Transfer Switch:

a) Normal source available for each (green).

b) Connected to normal (green).

c) Generator source available (green).

d) Connected to generator source (green).



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 6

2.4 METAL-ENCLOSED, CIRCUIT-BREAKER SWITCHGEAR (600 V AND LESS)

A. Source Limitations: Obtain components for paralleling low-voltage switchgear from ASCO.

B. Description: Factory assembled and tested, and complying with IEEE C37.20.1 and UL 1558.

C. Ratings, Voltage, and Short Circuit Capability to match existing.

D. Switchgear Fabrication:

1. Circuit-Breaker Terminals for Cable Connections: Silver-plated copper bus extensions

equipped with pressure connectors for conductors.

E. Circuit Breakers: Comply with IEEE C37.13, IEEE C37.16, and IEEE C37.17.

1. Ratings: As indicated for continuous, interrupting, and short-time current ratings for each

circuit breaker; voltage and frequency ratings same as switchgear.

2. Operating Mechanism: Mechanically and electrically trip-free, stored-energy operating

mechanism with the following features:

a. Normal Closing Speed: Independent of both control and operator.

b. Slow Closing Speed: Optional with operator for inspection and adjustment.

3. Stored-Energy Mechanism: Electrically charged, with optional manual charging.

4. Trip Devices:

a. Solid-state, overcurrent trip-device system consisting of one or two current

transformers or sensors per phase, and a release mechanism.

b. Functions: Long-time-delay, short-time-delay, and instantaneous-trip functions,

independent of each other in both action and adjustment.

c. Temperature Compensation: Ensures accuracy and calibration stability from minus

5 to plus 40 deg C.

d. Time-Current Characteristics: Field adjustable.

e. Current Adjustability: Dial settings and rating plugs on trip units or sensors on

circuit breakers, or a combination of these methods.

f. Long-Time- and Short-Time-Delay Functions: Three bands, minimum; marked

"minimum," "intermediate," and "maximum."

g. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for long-time- and short-time-trip functions. Equip

short-time-trip function for switchable I-squared-t operation.

h. Pickup Points: Five minimum, for instantaneous-trip functions.

i. Ground-fault protection alarm with at least three short-time-delay settings and

three trip-time-delay bands; adjustable current pickup. Arrange to provide

protection for the following:

1) Four-wire circuit or system.



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 7

j. Trip Indication: Labeled, battery-powered lights or mechanical targets on trip

device to indicate type of fault.

5. Auxiliary Contacts: For interlocking or remote indication of circuit-breaker position, with

spare auxiliary switches and other auxiliary switches required for normal circuit-breaker

operation, quantity as indicated. Each consists of two Type "a" and two Type "b" stages

(contacts) wired through secondary disconnect devices to a terminal block in stationary

housing.

6. Drawout Features: Circuit-breaker mounting assembly equipped with a racking

mechanism to position circuit breaker and hold it rigidly in connected, test, and

disconnected positions.

a. Interlocks: Prevent movement of circuit breaker to or from connected position

when it is closed.

b. Circuit-Breaker Positioning:

1) An open circuit breaker may be racked to or from connected, test, and

disconnected positions only with the associated compartment door closed,

unless live parts are covered by a full dead-front shield.

2) An open circuit breaker may be manually withdrawn to a position for

removal from the structure with the door open.

3) Status for connection devices for different positions includes the following:

a) Test Position: Primary disconnect devices disengaged, and secondary

disconnect devices and ground contact engaged.

b) Disconnected Position: Primary and secondary devices and ground

contact disengaged.

7. Alternate Maintenance Setting (AMS) Switch: Design for the temporary arc-flash

incident energy reduction during maintenance activities.

a. For each circuit breaker with 1200A frame or greater, provide a manual switch to

switch the circuit breaker short-time tripping characteristics to instantaneous with

minimum pick-up setting to reduce the danger from potential arc-flash at

downstream equipment.

b. Provide a lock feature for the switch so that it may be locked in either the OFF or

ON maintenance mode position.

c. Provide a blue LED indicating light to indicate switch is in the maintenance mode.

d. Wire contacts on all AMS switches to a common alarm input to the facility.

e. Wire locally with relays and terminal blocks to enable a remote switch and blue

LED indication light.

8. Padlocking Provisions: For installing at least three padlocks on each circuit breaker to

secure its enclosure and prevent movement of drawout mechanism.

9. Operating Handle: One for each circuit breaker capable of manual operation.

10. Mechanical Interlocking of Circuit Breakers: Uses a mechanical tripping lever or

equivalent design and electrical interlocks.



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 8

11. Indicating Lights: To indicate circuit breaker is open or closed, for main and bus tie

circuit breakers interlocked either with each other or with external devices.

F. Door-Mounted Control Components: Industrial-type oiltight devices and digital-display

indicator lamps.

G. Control Wiring:

1. Factory installed, complete with bundling, lacing, and protection.

2. Provide flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges

and for conductors for interconnections between shipping units.

3. Conductors shall be sized according to NFPA 70 for duty required.

H. Identification: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical

Systems" for electrical identification devices and installation.

1. Identify units, devices, controls, and wiring.

2. Mimic Bus: Continuous mimic bus, applied to front of paralleling low-voltage

switchgear, arranged in one-line diagram format, using symbols and lettered designations

consistent with approved mimic-bus diagram.

a. Mimic-bus segments coordinated with devices in paralleling low-voltage

switchgear sections to which applied, to produce a concise visual presentation of

principal paralleling switchgear components and connections.

b. Medium: Painted graphics, as selected by Architect.

c. Color: Contrasting with factory-finish background; as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, where switchgear will be installed for

compliance with installation tolerances, required clearances, and other conditions affecting

performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with applicable portions in NECA 400.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, and

temporary blocking of moving parts from switchgear units and components.



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 9

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning

signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Diagrams and Instructions:

1. Frame and mount under clear acrylic plastic on front of switchgear.

a. Operating Instructions: Printed basic instructions for switchgear, including control

and key-interlock sequences and emergency procedures.

b. System Power Riser Diagrams: Depict power sources, feeders, distribution

components, and major loads.

2. Storage for Maintenance: Include a rack or holder, near the operating instructions, for a

copy of maintenance manual.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:

1. Test insulation resistance for each new component, connecting supply, feeder, and

control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

3. Inspect paralleling switchgear installation, including wiring, components, connections,

and equipment.

4. Verify that electrical control wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal

by means of point-to-point continuity testing.


B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:



TRO No. 2017021


262313 - 10

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS.

Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for each of

the following NETA categories:

a. Circuit breakers.

E. Paralleling switchgear will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchgear. Remove front and rear panels so

joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switchgear 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchgear checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial

action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable, protective-relay trip characteristics according to results in Division 26

Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchgear. Vacuum dirt and

debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair damaged finishes.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION


adjust, operate, and maintain switchgear.




TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 1

SECTION 262413

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Service and distribution switchboards rated 600 V and less.

a. Indoor distribution switchboards.

b. Outdoor generator quick connect switchboard.

2. Transient voltage suppression devices.

3. Disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

a. Installed in new switchboards.

b. Installed in existing switchboard.

4. Instrumentation.

5. Control power.

6. Accessory components and features.

7. Identification.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switchboard, overcurrent protective device, transient voltage

suppression device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include

dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,

ratings, accessories, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances

and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment

features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 2

3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

4. Detail short-circuit current rating of switchboards and overcurrent protective devices.

5. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent


6. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include

selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

7. Include schematic and wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that switchboards, overcurrent protective

devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:







E. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used.

2. Test results that comply with requirements.

3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For switchboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

3. Time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device

included in switchboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable

ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

G. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective


1. Control-Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but

no fewer than two of each size and type.

2. Indicating Lights: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type but no

less than one of each size and type.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 3


A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers qualified as defined in NEMA PB 2.1 and

trained in electrical safety as required by NFPA 70E.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


testing.



D. Comply with NEMA PB 2.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Comply with UL 891.


A. Deliver switchboards in sections or lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.

B. Handle and prepare switchboards for installation according to NECA 400.


A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and structures

to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.

B. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install switchboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above switchboards is complete, and HVAC system is

operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy

levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

C. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 4

1. Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.

3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and

panels.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-

bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with

concrete.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace switchboard enclosures,

buswork, overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and factory installed interconnection wiring

that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's agrees to repair or replace surge protection devices that

fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Seismic Performance: Switchboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined

according to ASCE/SEI 7.


assembled components or on calculation. Shake-table testing shall comply with ICC-

ES AC156.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 5




2.2 GENERATOR QUICK CONNECT SWITCHBOARD


following:

1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.

2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.

3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Terminal section for cable-in, cable-out connections with uniquely labeled quick connect

terminals for the following:

1. Generator power (400A single pole cam-type male connectors, 4 per phase and neutral, 2

for ground)

2. 100A, 3 wire, single phase connections to enclosure load center (100A Receptable, Hubble

(or equivalent) #HBL4001R12W mounted with 15 degree adapter

C. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.

2. Sections front and rear aligned.

D. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.

E. Main-Bus Continuous: 1600 A.

F. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand

seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical

Systems."

G. Outdoor Enclosures: Type 3R.

1. Finish: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard color; undersurfaces treated with

corrosion-resistant undercoating.

2. Enclosure: Downward, rearward sloping roof; for each section, with provisions for

padlocking.

3. Ground-fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) duplex receptacle.

4. Power for space heaters, ventilation, lighting, and receptacle provided by a remote source.

H. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 6

I. Space Heaters: Factory-installed electric space heaters of sufficient wattage in each vertical

section to maintain enclosure temperature above expected dew point.

1. Space-Heater Control: Thermostats to maintain temperature of each section above

expected dew point.

2. Space-Heater Power Source: 120-V external branch circuit.

J. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank

compartments.

K. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide phase bus arrangement A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, and left to right

when viewed from the front of the switchboard.

2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity,.

3. Copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

4. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) hard-drawn copper of 98 percent

conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground

conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway

ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

5. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of

switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

6. Disconnect Links:

a. Isolate neutral bus from incoming neutral conductors.

b. Bond neutral bus to equipment-ground bus for switchboards utilized as service

equipment or separately derived systems.

7. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,

equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus

extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

2.3 SWITCHBOARDS


following:





B. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboards:

1. Main Devices: Fixed, individually mounted.

2. Branch Devices: Panel mounted.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 7

3. Sections front and rear aligned.

C. Nominal System Voltage: 480Y/277 V.

D. Main-Bus Continuous: 1600 A.

E. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate and test switchboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand

seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical

Systems."

F. Indoor Enclosures: Steel, NEMA 250, Type 1.

G. Enclosure Finish for Indoor Units: Factory-applied finish in manufacturer's standard gray finish

over a rust-inhibiting primer on treated metal surface.

H. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit breaker, metering, accessory, and blank

compartments.

I. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide phase bus arrangement A, B, C from front to back, top to bottom, and left to right

when viewed from the front of the switchboard.

2. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity,.

3. Copper feeder circuit-breaker line connections.

4. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch- (6-by-50-mm-) hard-drawn copper of 98 percent

conductivity, equipped with compression connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground

conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway

ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.

5. Main Phase Buses and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for entire length of

switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future extensions from both ends.

6. Disconnect Links:

a. Isolate neutral bus from incoming neutral conductors.

b. Bond neutral bus to equipment-ground bus for switchboards utilized as service

equipment or separately derived systems.

7. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of phase buses unless otherwise indicated,

equipped with compression connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Brace bus

extensions for busway feeder neutral bus.

J. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and

appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.

2.4 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES


following:



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 8





B. SPDs: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying

with UL 1449, Type 2.

1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:

a. Indicator light display for protection status.

b. Surge counter.

C. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase

shall not be less than 250kA. The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the

ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.

D. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 480Y/277 V, three-phase,

four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

2. Line to Ground: 1200 V for 480Y/277 V.

3. Line to Line: 2000 V for 480Y/277 V.

E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for 240/120 V, single-phase, three-wire circuits shall not

exceed the following:

1. Line to Neutral: 700 V.

2. Line to Ground: 700 V.

3. Line to Line: 1000 V.

F. SCCR: Equal or exceed 200 kA

G. Nominal Rating: 20 kA.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IN NEW

SWITCHBOARDS

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): 100 percent rated. Comply with UL 489, with

interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,

and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting

for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Transformer Primary and Secondary Circuit Breakers:

kVA Primary Breaker Secondary Breaker



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 9

15 SQD EG or FH

CH FD or HFD

GE TEY

SIEM HEG/HEB

SQD QO or HD

CH BAB

GE TEYH or TEYF

SIEM BL

30 SQD JA or FH or HG

CH FD or HFD

GE FB

SIEM BQD, E4, HE6

SQD Q2H or EG

CH FD

GE FE Record Plus

SIEM F6

45 SQD FH

CH FD or HFD

GE THFK or SEL or FE Record Plus

SIEM FG

SQD Q2H or JJ

CH ED or FD

GE TFK or TFJ or FE Record Plus

SIEM F6

75 SQD JJ

CH FD or HFD

GE THFK or SFL or FE Record Plus

SIEM HF6

SQD Q2H or JJ

CH ED

GE THQD or TFK or FG Record Plus

SIEM QJ2

Breakers with equivalent time-current curves may be used if approved. Breakers must be

shown to protect transformers without nuisance tripping and coordinate with upstream

breakers. Coordinate breaker AIC ratings with panelboard ratings and short circuit study.

3. Breakers upstream of 480-120/208V transformers: Breakers immediately upstream of

transformer primary protection breaker will include the Panelboard Main Breaker, where

used, and the Distribution Panel feeder breaker.

kVA Minimum

Breaker

Size

Upstream Breaker

15 125A SQD JG or JJ

CH JD or HJD

GE THFK or THJK or FG Record Plus

SIEM HEB


CH JD or HJD or KD or HKD or FD or HFD


SIEM HF6



GE THJK or FG Record Plus

SIEM JG

75 450A SQD Programmable LSI

CH Programmable LSI

GE Programmable LSI or SGLA or FG Record Plus

SIEM Programmable LSI

Breakers with equivalent time-current curves may be used if approved and shown to

coordinate with upstream and downstream breakers. Coordinate breaker AIC ratings with

panelboard ratings and short circuit study.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 10

4. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: For circuit breaker frame sizes 200A and

larger, magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

5. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing: For circuit breaker frame sizes 400A and

larger, field-replaceable rating plug or field-replicable electronic trip; and the following

field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault alarm, time delay, and I2t response.

6. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

7. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

material.

c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity

discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Alarm: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup

and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault alarm indicator.

B. Alternate Maintenance Setting (AMS) Switch: Design for the temporary arc-flash incident

energy reduction during maintenance activities.

1. For each circuit breaker with 1200A frame or greater, provide a manual switch to switch

the circuit breaker short-time tripping characteristics to instantaneous with minimum pick-

up setting to reduce the danger from potential arc-flash at downstream equipment.

2. Provide a lock feature for the switch so that it may be locked in either the OFF or ON

maintenance mode position.

3. Provide a blue LED indicating light to indicate switch is in the maintenance mode.

4. Wire contacts on all AMS switches to a common alarm input to the facility.

5. Wire locally with relays and terminal blocks to enable a remote switch and blue LED

indication light.

2.6 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IN EXISTING

SWITCHBOARDS

A. Insulated-Case Circuit Breaker (ICCB): 100 percent rated, sealed, insulated-case power circuit

breaker with interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.

1. Drawout circuit-breaker mounting.

2. Two-step, stored-energy closing.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 11

3. Full-function, microprocessor-based trip units with interchangeable rating plug, trip

indicators, and the following field-adjustable settings:

a. Instantaneous trip.

b. Long- and short-time pickup level

c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.

d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. Control Voltage to match existing switchgear.

B. Alternate Maintenance Setting (AMS) Switch: Design for the temporary arc-flash incident










indication light.

2.7 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Instrument Transformers: IEEE C57.13, NEMA EI 21.1, and the following:

1. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units larger

than 3 kVA.

2.8 CONTROL POWER

A. Control Circuits: 120-V ac, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-

power transformer.

B. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide

flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for conductors

for interconnections between shipping units.

2.9 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 12

B. Portable Circuit-Breaker Lifting Device: Floor-supported, roller-based, elevating carriage

arranged for movement of circuit breakers in and out of compartments for present and future

circuit breakers.

C. Mounting Accessories: For anchors, mounting channels, bolts, washers, and other mounting

accessories, comply with requirements in Section 260548.16 "Seismic Controls for Electrical

Systems" or manufacturer's instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store switchboards according to NECA 400.

1. Lift or move switchboards with spreader bars and manufacturer-supplied lifting straps

following manufacturer's instructions.

2. Use rollers, slings, or other manufacturer-approved methods if lifting straps are not

furnished.

3. Protect from moisture, dust, dirt, and debris during storage and installation.

4. Install temporary heating during storage per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Examine switchboards before installation. Reject switchboards that are moisture damaged or

physically damaged.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NECA 400.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install switchboards on concrete base, 4-inch (100-mm) nominal

thickness.

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.





4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to switchboards.



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 13

5. Anchor switchboard to building structure at the top of the switchboard if required or

recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.

D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for

switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.

Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount

on front of switchboards.

F. Install filler plates in unused spaces of panel-mounted sections.

G. Install overcurrent protective devices, transient voltage suppression devices, and instrumentation.

1. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Bond conduits entering underneath the switchboard to the equipment ground bus with a bonding

conductor sized per NFPA 70.

B. Support and secure conductors within the switchboard according to NFPA 70.

C. Extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway ground connection and support cable at

intervals in vertical run.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION


signs complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with a nameplate complying

with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical

Systems."

C. Device Nameplates: Label each disconnecting and overcurrent protective device and each meter

and control device mounted in compartment doors with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 14


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Acceptance Testing:

a. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,

feeder, and control circuit. Open control and metering circuits within the

switchboard, and remove neutral connection to surge protection and other electronic

devices prior to insulation test. Reconnect after test..

b. Test continuity of each circuit.

2. Test ground-fault a of equipment for service equipment per NFPA 70.


Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

4. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

5. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front

panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

6. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Switchboard will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies switchboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as




TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 15

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent

Protective Device Coordination Study."

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat, to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's

written instructions, until switchboard is ready to be energized and placed into service.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain switchboards, overcurrent

protective devices, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram microprocessor-

based trip, monitoring, and communication units.

3.9 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint

splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.

Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.




TRO No. 2017021

SWITCHBOARDS

262413 - 16

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 1

SECTION 262416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards.

2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ATS: Acceptance testing specification.

B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

C. GFEP: Ground-fault equipment protection.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

F. SPD: Surge protective device.

G. VPR: Voltage protection rating.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard.

1. Include materials, switching and overcurrent protective devices, SPDs, accessories, and

components indicated.

2. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical

characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 2

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details.

2. Show tabulations of installed devices with nameplates, conductor termination sizes,

equipment features, and ratings.

3. Detail enclosure types including mounting and anchorage, environmental protection,

knockouts, corner treatments, covers and doors, gaskets, hinges, and locks.

4. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.

5. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices.

6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent


7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective

device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include

selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include an Internet link

for electronic access to downloadable PDF of the coordination curves.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load

balancing.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective

device that allows adjustments.




1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock.

2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 or 9002 certified.


A. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside panelboards; install temporary

electric heating (250 W per panelboard) to prevent condensation.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 3

B. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work

in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC

system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at

occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise

indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F (minus 5 deg C) to plus 104 deg F

(plus 40 deg C).

b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied

by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging

to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Owner's written permission.

3. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace panelboards that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Panelboard Warranty Period: 18 months from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

SPD that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. SPD Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 4

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELBOARDS AND LOAD CENTERS COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in

Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards

including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with

indicated maximum dimensions.



D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.

F. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.

b. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

c. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:

NEMA 250, Type 12.

2. Height: 84 inches (2.13 m) maximum.

3. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box

dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. Trims shall cover all live parts and shall

have no exposed hardware.

4. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel and galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after

cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish

consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.

5. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

G. Incoming Mains:

1. Location: Top.

2. Main Breaker: Main lug interiors up to 400 amperes shall be field convertible to main

breaker.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 5

H. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

a. Plating shall run entire length of bus.

b. Bus shall be fully rated the entire length.

2. Interiors shall be factory assembled into a unit. Replacing switching and protective devices

shall not disturb adjacent units or require removing the main bus connectors.

3. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

4. Full-Sized Neutral: Equipped with full-capacity bonding strap for service entrance

applications. Mount electrically isolated from enclosure. Do not mount neutral bus in

gutter.

I. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.

2. Terminations shall allow use of 75 deg C rated conductors without derating.

3. Size: Lugs suitable for indicated conductor sizes, with additional gutter space, if required,

for larger conductors.

4. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.

5. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type, with a lug on the bar

for each pole in the panelboard.

J. Future Devices: Panelboards or load centers shall have mounting brackets, bus connections, filler

plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

1. Percentage of Future Space Capacity: Five percent.

K. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit

current available at terminals. Assembly listed by an NRTL for 100 percent interrupting capacity.

1. Panelboards and overcurrent protective devices rated above 240 V and less than 600 V

shall have short-circuit ratings as shown on Drawings, but not less than 14,000 A rms

symmetrical.


A. Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined

according to SEI/ASCE 7.


from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 6

B. Surge Suppression: Factory installed as an integral part of indicated panelboards, complying with

UL 1449 SPD Type 2.

2.3 POWER PANELBOARDS


following:




B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches (914 mm) high, provide two latches, keyed alike.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only, as shown on drawings.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller:

Plug-in circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A:

Plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for

removal.

G. Alternate Maintenance Setting (AMS) Switch: Design for the temporary arc-flash incident










indication light.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


following:






TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 7




B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only, as shown on drawings.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing

adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES


following:




B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet

available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers:

a. Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads.

b. Instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits.

c. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Transformer Primary and Secondary Circuit Breakers:

kVA Primary Breaker Secondary Breaker

15 SQD EG or FH

CH FD or HFD

GE TEY

SIEM HEG/HEB

SQD QO or HD

CH BAB

GE TEYH or TEYF

SIEM BL

30 SQD JA or FH or HG

CH FD or HFD

GE FB

SIEM BQD, E4, HE6

SQD Q2H or EG

CH FD

GE FE Record Plus

SIEM F6

45 SQD FH

CH FD or HFD

GE THFK or SEL or FE Record Plus

SIEM FG

SQD Q2H or JJ

CH ED or FD

GE TFK or TFJ or FE Record Plus

SIEM F6









TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 8

75 SQD JJ

CH FD or HFD

GE THFK or SFL or FE Record Plus

SIEM HF6

SQD Q2H or JJ

CH ED

GE THQD or TFK or FG Record Plus

SIEM QJ2

Breakers with equivalent time-current curves may be used if approved. Breakers must be

shown to protect transformers without nuisance tripping and coordinate with upstream

breakers. Coordinate breaker AIC ratings with panelboard ratings and short circuit study.

3. Breakers upstream of 480-120/208V transformers: Breakers immediately upstream of

transformer primary protection breaker will include the Panelboard Main Breaker, where

used, and the Distribution Panel feeder breaker.

kVA Minimum

Breaker

Size

Upstream Breaker


CH JD or HJD

GE THFK or THJK or SEL or FG Record Plus

SIEM HEB




SIEM HF6



GE THJK or FG Record Plus

SIEM JG

75 450A SQD Programmable LSI

CH Programmable LSI

GE Programmable LSI or SGLA or FG Record Plus

SIEM Programmable LSI

Breakers with equivalent time-current curves may be used if approved and shown to

coordinate with upstream and downstream breakers. Coordinate breaker AIC ratings with

panelboard ratings and short circuit study.

4. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: For circuit breaker frame sizes 200A and

larger, magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

5. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: To be used for all circuit breaker frame sizes 400A and

larger:

a. RMS sensing.

b. Field-replaceable rating plug or electronic trip.

c. Digital display of settings, trip targets, and indicated metering displays.

d. Multi-button keypad to access programmable functions and monitored data.

e. Ten-event, trip-history log. Each trip event shall be recorded with type, phase, and

magnitude of fault that caused the trip.

f. Integral test jack for connection to portable test set or laptop computer.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 9

g. Field-Adjustable Settings:

1) Instantaneous trip.

2) Long- and short-time pickup levels.

3) Long and short time adjustments.

4) Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I squared T response.

6. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less

than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

7. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault

protection (6-mA trip).

8. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault

protection (30-mA trip).

9. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

b. Breaker handle indicates tripped status.

c. UL listed for reverse connection without restrictive line or load ratings.

d. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials.

e. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and HID lighting

circuits.

f. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable

pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

2.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Panelboard Label: Manufacturer's name and trademark, voltage, amperage, number of phases,

and number of poles shall be located on the interior of the panelboard door.

B. Breaker Labels: Faceplate shall list current rating, UL and IEC certification standards, and AIC

rating.

C. Circuit Directory: Directory card inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

1. Circuit directory shall identify specific purpose with detail sufficient to distinguish it from

all other circuits.

2.7 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES

A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device

test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 10

B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from

panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and

switchboard class relays.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify actual conditions with field measurements prior to ordering panelboards to verify that

equipment fits in allocated space in, and comply with, minimum required clearances specified in

NFPA 70.

B. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.

C. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have

been subjected to water saturation.

D. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that

penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,

raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.

Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and

panels.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.

D. Equipment Mounting:

1. Install panelboards on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s).

2. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.

3. Comply with requirements for seismic control devices specified in Section 260548.16

"Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and

temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 11

F. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

G. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

H. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box.

I. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back

box.

J. Mounting panelboards with space behind is recommended for damp, wet, or dirty locations. The

steel slotted supports in the following paragraph provide an even mounting surface and the

recommended space behind to prevent moisture or dirt collection.

K. Mount surface-mounted panelboards to steel slotted supports 1 1/4 inch (32 mm) in depth. Orient

steel slotted supports vertically.

L. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.

2. Tighten bolted connections and circuit breaker connections using calibrated torque wrench

or torque screwdriver per manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Make grounding connections and bond neutral for services and separately derived systems to

ground. Make connections to grounding electrodes, separate grounds for isolated ground bars,

and connections to separate ground bars.

N. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

O. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space

designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised

floor space or below slab not on grade.

P. Arrange conductors in gutters into groups and bundle and wrap with wire ties after completing

load balancing.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION


signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate

Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter

to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. Install directory inside panelboard

door.



TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 12

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements

for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Install warning signs complying with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for

Electrical Systems" identifying source of remote circuit.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,

and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.




2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Perform the following infrared scan tests and inspections and prepare reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days

after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each panelboard. Remove front

panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

panelboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment:

1) Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect

significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for

device.

D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards

included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial


3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as




TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 13

B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Division 26 Section "Overcurrent

Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance,

measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure loads during period of normal facility operations.

2. Perform circuit changes to achieve load balancing outside normal facility operation

schedule or at times directed by the Architect. Avoid disrupting services such as fax

machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After changing circuits to achieve load balancing, recheck loads during normal facility

operations. Record load readings before and after changing circuits to achieve load

balancing.

4. Tolerance: Maximum difference between phase loads, within a panelboard, shall not

exceed 20 percent.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's


3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. Remove paint splatters

and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair

exposed surfaces to match original finish.




TRO No. 2017021

PANELBOARDS

262416 - 14

NON-TEXT PAGE



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 1

SECTION 263600

TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL




1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches.

2. Nonautomatic transfer switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating

characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum

clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material

lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, power sources, and

load.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches

accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section

"Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:



a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the

unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."





TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 2



D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.

E. Field quality-control reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual.

2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and

emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of

notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to

conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing

Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in

29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational

Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering

Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switches and nonautomatic transfer switches

through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,


intended use.

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


G. Comply with NFPA 99.

H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 3


A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities

occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only

after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical

service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Owner's written

permission.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transfer switches that fail in

materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Contactor Transfer Switches:


following:

a. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP.

b. Russelectric, Inc.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total

system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch

ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective

devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing





TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 4

according to UL 1008. The transfer switch shall be rated to close on and withstand the available

RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the automatic transfer switch/bypass isolation switch

terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or

better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Microprocessor Controller:

1. The Controller’s sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor

for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially

through an optional serial communication module. The controller shall have a minimum

of two asynchronous serial ports and shall be capable of interfacing with a network of

transfer switches/generator master controls.

2. A single controller shall provide a minimum of twelve selectable nominal voltages for

maximum application flexibility and minimal spare part requirements. Voltage sensing

shall be true RMS type and shall be accurate to plus or minus 0.2 percent. The panel

shall be capable of operating over a temperature range of minus 20 to plus 60 deg C and

storage from minus 55 to plus 85 deg C.

3. A four-line, 20 character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the

controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters.

Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the

serial communications port. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP

switches on the controller:

a. Nominal line voltage and frequency

b. Single or three phase sensing

c. Operating parameter protection

d. Transfer operating mode configuration

4. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port)

of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall

be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected

(ABC or CBA).

5. The controller shall also be capable of monitoring, logging, and trending power data and

shall include the following:

a. The controller shall be accurate to 1 percent measured. Voltage and current for all

phases shall be sampled simultaneously to assure high accuracy in conditions of

low power factor or large waveform distortions (harmonics).

b. The controller shall be capable of operating at nominal frequencies of 45 to 66 Hz.

c. The controller shall accept inputs from industry standard current transformers (5A

secondary). Direct phase voltage connections, 600VAC and under, shall be

possible without the use of PTs.

d. The controller shall be capable of being applied in single or 3-phase, three and four

wire circuits.



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 5

e. The controller shall use industry standard open architecture communication

protocol for serial communications via multidrop connection to other controllers

and to a master terminal with up to 4000 ft. of cable, or further, with the addition

of a communication repeater. The serial communication port shall be RS422/485

compatible.

f. All setup parameters required by the controller for power monitoring shall be

stored in non-volatile memory and retained in the event of a control power

interruption.

g. The following metered readings shall be communicated by the controller, via local

display and serial communication. All CTs and other equipment necessary to

accumulate this data shall be included with the transfer switch.

1) Current, per phase RMS and neutral

2) Current unbalance percent

3) Voltage, phase-to-phase and phase-to neutral

4) Voltage unbalance percent

5) Real power (kW), per phase and 3-phase total

6) Apparent power (kVA), per phase and 3-phase total

7) Reactive power (kVAR), per phase and 3-phase total

8) Power factor, 3-phase total and per phase

9) Frequency

10) Accumulated Energy (kWh, kVAh, and kVARh)

6. Displaying each of the metered quantities shall be accomplished through the use of menu

scroll buttons.

7. Setup for systems requirements shall be allowed through the local access display. Setup

provisions shall include:

a. CT rating (xxxxx:5)

b. System type (single; three phase, three or four wire)

8. Reset of the following electrical parameters shall also be allowed from the local access

display:

a. Real Energy (kWh)

b. Apparent Energy (kVAh)

c. Reactive Energy (kVARh)

9. All reset and setup functions shall have a means for protection against

unauthorized/accidental changes.

10. The Controller shall be capable of storing records in memory for access either locally or

remotely for up to 100 events. The reports shall include date, time, and a description of

the event and shall be maintained in a non-volatile memory.

11. Controller shall provide the ability to communicate via Ethernet connection or generator

fiber optic network and shall be capable of full communication with Emergency

Generator Synchronization Switchgear.



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 6

E. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge

withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall

meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

F. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-

motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

G. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current

between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case

circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing

contacts.

H. Neutral Switching. Where four-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral pole switched

simultaneously with phase poles.

I. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings,

either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.

Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section

"Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring

indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom

entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

K. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 1, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508,


2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops

during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical

operator during manual operation.



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 7

D. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates

in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

E. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position

arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional,

time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds

minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both

transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live.

F. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer

and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one

second.

2. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup

voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at

90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal.

Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

3. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and

factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained

undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

4. Test Switch: A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the

test/reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal-source failure. The reset

position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to

normal.

5. Commit/No Commit: Provide the ability to select “commit/no commit to transfer” to

determine whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if the

normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.

6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source

Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency

Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts

for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Retransfer to Normal Mode Selector Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so

automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of

condition of normal source. While in manual retransfer mode, if an emergency source

failure should occur and the normal source is still available, the manual retransfer will be

automatically bypassed, causing the switch to automatically transfer the load back to the

normal source.



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 8

a. Mode selector switch shall have two maintained positions which are labeled

“AUTOMATIC” and “MANUAL”.

b. A red light shall be illuminated when selector switch is set to “MANUAL”

retransfer mode.

c. A momentary switch shall be provided to manually initiate retransfer to the normal

source.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and

normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory

set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls

after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine

generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers

and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset

intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30

minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-

minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without

load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.

c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not

available.

2.4 NONAUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Operation: Electrically actuated by push buttons designated "Normal Source" and "Alternate

Source." Switch shall be capable of transferring load in either direction with either or both

sources energized.

B. Double-Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops

during switching sequence.

C. Nonautomatic Transfer-Switch Accessories:

1. Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

2. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

alternate-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source

Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Alternate

Source Available."



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 9

3. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: One set of normally closed contacts for each switch

position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure

proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for

compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with

NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according

to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for

Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches (100 mm) high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend

base no more than 4 inches (100 mm) in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions

of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct

concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical

Systems."

C. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control

and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer.

Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required

wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical

Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors

and Cables."



TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 10


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests

and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements.



3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-

resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages

and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified

minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features.

c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed.

d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for

each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of

emergency source with normal source available.

b. Verify time-delay settings.

c. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings.

d. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer

time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-

down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power

delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

C. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured

insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested

component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.




TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 11

F. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final

Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and

connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each

switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to

detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked

and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial


3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and

related equipment.




TRO No. 2017021

TRANSFER SWITCHES

263600 - 12

NON-TEXT PAGE